cse.cc revision 1.1.1.1 1 /* Common subexpression elimination for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1987-2022 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3
4 This file is part of GCC.
5
6 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
7 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
8 Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
9 version.
10
11 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
12 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
13 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
14 for more details.
15
16 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17 along with GCC; see the file COPYING3. If not see
18 <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */
19
20 #include "config.h"
21 #include "system.h"
22 #include "coretypes.h"
23 #include "backend.h"
24 #include "target.h"
25 #include "rtl.h"
26 #include "tree.h"
27 #include "cfghooks.h"
28 #include "df.h"
29 #include "memmodel.h"
30 #include "tm_p.h"
31 #include "insn-config.h"
32 #include "regs.h"
33 #include "emit-rtl.h"
34 #include "recog.h"
35 #include "cfgrtl.h"
36 #include "cfganal.h"
37 #include "cfgcleanup.h"
38 #include "alias.h"
39 #include "toplev.h"
40 #include "rtlhooks-def.h"
41 #include "tree-pass.h"
42 #include "dbgcnt.h"
43 #include "rtl-iter.h"
44 #include "regs.h"
45 #include "function-abi.h"
46 #include "rtlanal.h"
47 #include "expr.h"
48
49 /* The basic idea of common subexpression elimination is to go
50 through the code, keeping a record of expressions that would
51 have the same value at the current scan point, and replacing
52 expressions encountered with the cheapest equivalent expression.
53
54 It is too complicated to keep track of the different possibilities
55 when control paths merge in this code; so, at each label, we forget all
56 that is known and start fresh. This can be described as processing each
57 extended basic block separately. We have a separate pass to perform
58 global CSE.
59
60 Note CSE can turn a conditional or computed jump into a nop or
61 an unconditional jump. When this occurs we arrange to run the jump
62 optimizer after CSE to delete the unreachable code.
63
64 We use two data structures to record the equivalent expressions:
65 a hash table for most expressions, and a vector of "quantity
66 numbers" to record equivalent (pseudo) registers.
67
68 The use of the special data structure for registers is desirable
69 because it is faster. It is possible because registers references
70 contain a fairly small number, the register number, taken from
71 a contiguously allocated series, and two register references are
72 identical if they have the same number. General expressions
73 do not have any such thing, so the only way to retrieve the
74 information recorded on an expression other than a register
75 is to keep it in a hash table.
76
77 Registers and "quantity numbers":
78
79 At the start of each basic block, all of the (hardware and pseudo)
80 registers used in the function are given distinct quantity
81 numbers to indicate their contents. During scan, when the code
82 copies one register into another, we copy the quantity number.
83 When a register is loaded in any other way, we allocate a new
84 quantity number to describe the value generated by this operation.
85 `REG_QTY (N)' records what quantity register N is currently thought
86 of as containing.
87
88 All real quantity numbers are greater than or equal to zero.
89 If register N has not been assigned a quantity, `REG_QTY (N)' will
90 equal -N - 1, which is always negative.
91
92 Quantity numbers below zero do not exist and none of the `qty_table'
93 entries should be referenced with a negative index.
94
95 We also maintain a bidirectional chain of registers for each
96 quantity number. The `qty_table` members `first_reg' and `last_reg',
97 and `reg_eqv_table' members `next' and `prev' hold these chains.
98
99 The first register in a chain is the one whose lifespan is least local.
100 Among equals, it is the one that was seen first.
101 We replace any equivalent register with that one.
102
103 If two registers have the same quantity number, it must be true that
104 REG expressions with qty_table `mode' must be in the hash table for both
105 registers and must be in the same class.
106
107 The converse is not true. Since hard registers may be referenced in
108 any mode, two REG expressions might be equivalent in the hash table
109 but not have the same quantity number if the quantity number of one
110 of the registers is not the same mode as those expressions.
111
112 Constants and quantity numbers
113
114 When a quantity has a known constant value, that value is stored
115 in the appropriate qty_table `const_rtx'. This is in addition to
116 putting the constant in the hash table as is usual for non-regs.
117
118 Whether a reg or a constant is preferred is determined by the configuration
119 macro CONST_COSTS and will often depend on the constant value. In any
120 event, expressions containing constants can be simplified, by fold_rtx.
121
122 When a quantity has a known nearly constant value (such as an address
123 of a stack slot), that value is stored in the appropriate qty_table
124 `const_rtx'.
125
126 Integer constants don't have a machine mode. However, cse
127 determines the intended machine mode from the destination
128 of the instruction that moves the constant. The machine mode
129 is recorded in the hash table along with the actual RTL
130 constant expression so that different modes are kept separate.
131
132 Other expressions:
133
134 To record known equivalences among expressions in general
135 we use a hash table called `table'. It has a fixed number of buckets
136 that contain chains of `struct table_elt' elements for expressions.
137 These chains connect the elements whose expressions have the same
138 hash codes.
139
140 Other chains through the same elements connect the elements which
141 currently have equivalent values.
142
143 Register references in an expression are canonicalized before hashing
144 the expression. This is done using `reg_qty' and qty_table `first_reg'.
145 The hash code of a register reference is computed using the quantity
146 number, not the register number.
147
148 When the value of an expression changes, it is necessary to remove from the
149 hash table not just that expression but all expressions whose values
150 could be different as a result.
151
152 1. If the value changing is in memory, except in special cases
153 ANYTHING referring to memory could be changed. That is because
154 nobody knows where a pointer does not point.
155 The function `invalidate_memory' removes what is necessary.
156
157 The special cases are when the address is constant or is
158 a constant plus a fixed register such as the frame pointer
159 or a static chain pointer. When such addresses are stored in,
160 we can tell exactly which other such addresses must be invalidated
161 due to overlap. `invalidate' does this.
162 All expressions that refer to non-constant
163 memory addresses are also invalidated. `invalidate_memory' does this.
164
165 2. If the value changing is a register, all expressions
166 containing references to that register, and only those,
167 must be removed.
168
169 Because searching the entire hash table for expressions that contain
170 a register is very slow, we try to figure out when it isn't necessary.
171 Precisely, this is necessary only when expressions have been
172 entered in the hash table using this register, and then the value has
173 changed, and then another expression wants to be added to refer to
174 the register's new value. This sequence of circumstances is rare
175 within any one basic block.
176
177 `REG_TICK' and `REG_IN_TABLE', accessors for members of
178 cse_reg_info, are used to detect this case. REG_TICK (i) is
179 incremented whenever a value is stored in register i.
180 REG_IN_TABLE (i) holds -1 if no references to register i have been
181 entered in the table; otherwise, it contains the value REG_TICK (i)
182 had when the references were entered. If we want to enter a
183 reference and REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i), we must scan and
184 remove old references. Until we want to enter a new entry, the
185 mere fact that the two vectors don't match makes the entries be
186 ignored if anyone tries to match them.
187
188 Registers themselves are entered in the hash table as well as in
189 the equivalent-register chains. However, `REG_TICK' and
190 `REG_IN_TABLE' do not apply to expressions which are simple
191 register references. These expressions are removed from the table
192 immediately when they become invalid, and this can be done even if
193 we do not immediately search for all the expressions that refer to
194 the register.
195
196 A CLOBBER rtx in an instruction invalidates its operand for further
197 reuse. A CLOBBER or SET rtx whose operand is a MEM:BLK
198 invalidates everything that resides in memory.
199
200 Related expressions:
201
202 Constant expressions that differ only by an additive integer
203 are called related. When a constant expression is put in
204 the table, the related expression with no constant term
205 is also entered. These are made to point at each other
206 so that it is possible to find out if there exists any
207 register equivalent to an expression related to a given expression. */
208
209 /* Length of qty_table vector. We know in advance we will not need
210 a quantity number this big. */
211
212 static int max_qty;
213
214 /* Next quantity number to be allocated.
215 This is 1 + the largest number needed so far. */
216
217 static int next_qty;
218
219 /* Per-qty information tracking.
220
221 `first_reg' and `last_reg' track the head and tail of the
222 chain of registers which currently contain this quantity.
223
224 `mode' contains the machine mode of this quantity.
225
226 `const_rtx' holds the rtx of the constant value of this
227 quantity, if known. A summations of the frame/arg pointer
228 and a constant can also be entered here. When this holds
229 a known value, `const_insn' is the insn which stored the
230 constant value.
231
232 `comparison_{code,const,qty}' are used to track when a
233 comparison between a quantity and some constant or register has
234 been passed. In such a case, we know the results of the comparison
235 in case we see it again. These members record a comparison that
236 is known to be true. `comparison_code' holds the rtx code of such
237 a comparison, else it is set to UNKNOWN and the other two
238 comparison members are undefined. `comparison_const' holds
239 the constant being compared against, or zero if the comparison
240 is not against a constant. `comparison_qty' holds the quantity
241 being compared against when the result is known. If the comparison
242 is not with a register, `comparison_qty' is INT_MIN. */
243
244 struct qty_table_elem
245 {
246 rtx const_rtx;
247 rtx_insn *const_insn;
248 rtx comparison_const;
249 int comparison_qty;
250 unsigned int first_reg, last_reg;
251 /* The sizes of these fields should match the sizes of the
252 code and mode fields of struct rtx_def (see rtl.h). */
253 ENUM_BITFIELD(rtx_code) comparison_code : 16;
254 ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) mode : 8;
255 };
256
257 /* The table of all qtys, indexed by qty number. */
258 static struct qty_table_elem *qty_table;
259
260 /* Insn being scanned. */
261
262 static rtx_insn *this_insn;
263 static bool optimize_this_for_speed_p;
264
265 /* Index by register number, gives the number of the next (or
266 previous) register in the chain of registers sharing the same
267 value.
268
269 Or -1 if this register is at the end of the chain.
270
271 If REG_QTY (N) == -N - 1, reg_eqv_table[N].next is undefined. */
272
273 /* Per-register equivalence chain. */
274 struct reg_eqv_elem
275 {
276 int next, prev;
277 };
278
279 /* The table of all register equivalence chains. */
280 static struct reg_eqv_elem *reg_eqv_table;
281
282 struct cse_reg_info
283 {
284 /* The timestamp at which this register is initialized. */
285 unsigned int timestamp;
286
287 /* The quantity number of the register's current contents. */
288 int reg_qty;
289
290 /* The number of times the register has been altered in the current
291 basic block. */
292 int reg_tick;
293
294 /* The REG_TICK value at which rtx's containing this register are
295 valid in the hash table. If this does not equal the current
296 reg_tick value, such expressions existing in the hash table are
297 invalid. */
298 int reg_in_table;
299
300 /* The SUBREG that was set when REG_TICK was last incremented. Set
301 to -1 if the last store was to the whole register, not a subreg. */
302 unsigned int subreg_ticked;
303 };
304
305 /* A table of cse_reg_info indexed by register numbers. */
306 static struct cse_reg_info *cse_reg_info_table;
307
308 /* The size of the above table. */
309 static unsigned int cse_reg_info_table_size;
310
311 /* The index of the first entry that has not been initialized. */
312 static unsigned int cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized;
313
314 /* The timestamp at the beginning of the current run of
315 cse_extended_basic_block. We increment this variable at the beginning of
316 the current run of cse_extended_basic_block. The timestamp field of a
317 cse_reg_info entry matches the value of this variable if and only
318 if the entry has been initialized during the current run of
319 cse_extended_basic_block. */
320 static unsigned int cse_reg_info_timestamp;
321
322 /* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers for which there is
323 currently a REG expression in the hash table. Note the difference
324 from the above variables, which indicate if the REG is mentioned in some
325 expression in the table. */
326
327 static HARD_REG_SET hard_regs_in_table;
328
329 /* True if CSE has altered the CFG. */
330 static bool cse_cfg_altered;
331
332 /* True if CSE has altered conditional jump insns in such a way
333 that jump optimization should be redone. */
334 static bool cse_jumps_altered;
335
336 /* True if we put a LABEL_REF into the hash table for an INSN
337 without a REG_LABEL_OPERAND, we have to rerun jump after CSE
338 to put in the note. */
339 static bool recorded_label_ref;
340
341 /* canon_hash stores 1 in do_not_record if it notices a reference to PC or
342 some other volatile subexpression. */
343
344 static int do_not_record;
345
346 /* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory
347 if it notices a reference to memory within the expression being hashed. */
348
349 static int hash_arg_in_memory;
350
351 /* The hash table contains buckets which are chains of `struct table_elt's,
352 each recording one expression's information.
353 That expression is in the `exp' field.
354
355 The canon_exp field contains a canonical (from the point of view of
356 alias analysis) version of the `exp' field.
357
358 Those elements with the same hash code are chained in both directions
359 through the `next_same_hash' and `prev_same_hash' fields.
360
361 Each set of expressions with equivalent values
362 are on a two-way chain through the `next_same_value'
363 and `prev_same_value' fields, and all point with
364 the `first_same_value' field at the first element in
365 that chain. The chain is in order of increasing cost.
366 Each element's cost value is in its `cost' field.
367
368 The `in_memory' field is nonzero for elements that
369 involve any reference to memory. These elements are removed
370 whenever a write is done to an unidentified location in memory.
371 To be safe, we assume that a memory address is unidentified unless
372 the address is either a symbol constant or a constant plus
373 the frame pointer or argument pointer.
374
375 The `related_value' field is used to connect related expressions
376 (that differ by adding an integer).
377 The related expressions are chained in a circular fashion.
378 `related_value' is zero for expressions for which this
379 chain is not useful.
380
381 The `cost' field stores the cost of this element's expression.
382 The `regcost' field stores the value returned by approx_reg_cost for
383 this element's expression.
384
385 The `is_const' flag is set if the element is a constant (including
386 a fixed address).
387
388 The `flag' field is used as a temporary during some search routines.
389
390 The `mode' field is usually the same as GET_MODE (`exp'), but
391 if `exp' is a CONST_INT and has no machine mode then the `mode'
392 field is the mode it was being used as. Each constant is
393 recorded separately for each mode it is used with. */
394
395 struct table_elt
396 {
397 rtx exp;
398 rtx canon_exp;
399 struct table_elt *next_same_hash;
400 struct table_elt *prev_same_hash;
401 struct table_elt *next_same_value;
402 struct table_elt *prev_same_value;
403 struct table_elt *first_same_value;
404 struct table_elt *related_value;
405 int cost;
406 int regcost;
407 /* The size of this field should match the size
408 of the mode field of struct rtx_def (see rtl.h). */
409 ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) mode : 8;
410 char in_memory;
411 char is_const;
412 char flag;
413 };
414
415 /* We don't want a lot of buckets, because we rarely have very many
416 things stored in the hash table, and a lot of buckets slows
417 down a lot of loops that happen frequently. */
418 #define HASH_SHIFT 5
419 #define HASH_SIZE (1 << HASH_SHIFT)
420 #define HASH_MASK (HASH_SIZE - 1)
421
422 /* Compute hash code of X in mode M. Special-case case where X is a pseudo
423 register (hard registers may require `do_not_record' to be set). */
424
425 #define HASH(X, M) \
426 ((REG_P (X) && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER \
427 ? (((unsigned) REG << 7) + (unsigned) REG_QTY (REGNO (X))) \
428 : canon_hash (X, M)) & HASH_MASK)
429
430 /* Like HASH, but without side-effects. */
431 #define SAFE_HASH(X, M) \
432 ((REG_P (X) && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER \
433 ? (((unsigned) REG << 7) + (unsigned) REG_QTY (REGNO (X))) \
434 : safe_hash (X, M)) & HASH_MASK)
435
436 /* Determine whether register number N is considered a fixed register for the
437 purpose of approximating register costs.
438 It is desirable to replace other regs with fixed regs, to reduce need for
439 non-fixed hard regs.
440 A reg wins if it is either the frame pointer or designated as fixed. */
441 #define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
442 ((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || (N) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM \
443 || fixed_regs[N] || global_regs[N])
444
445 /* Compute cost of X, as stored in the `cost' field of a table_elt. Fixed
446 hard registers and pointers into the frame are the cheapest with a cost
447 of 0. Next come pseudos with a cost of one and other hard registers with
448 a cost of 2. Aside from these special cases, call `rtx_cost'. */
449
450 #define CHEAP_REGNO(N) \
451 (REGNO_PTR_FRAME_P (N) \
452 || (HARD_REGISTER_NUM_P (N) \
453 && FIXED_REGNO_P (N) && REGNO_REG_CLASS (N) != NO_REGS))
454
455 #define COST(X, MODE) \
456 (REG_P (X) ? 0 : notreg_cost (X, MODE, SET, 1))
457 #define COST_IN(X, MODE, OUTER, OPNO) \
458 (REG_P (X) ? 0 : notreg_cost (X, MODE, OUTER, OPNO))
459
460 /* Get the number of times this register has been updated in this
461 basic block. */
462
463 #define REG_TICK(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->reg_tick)
464
465 /* Get the point at which REG was recorded in the table. */
466
467 #define REG_IN_TABLE(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->reg_in_table)
468
469 /* Get the SUBREG set at the last increment to REG_TICK (-1 if not a
470 SUBREG). */
471
472 #define SUBREG_TICKED(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->subreg_ticked)
473
474 /* Get the quantity number for REG. */
475
476 #define REG_QTY(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->reg_qty)
477
478 /* Determine if the quantity number for register X represents a valid index
479 into the qty_table. */
480
481 #define REGNO_QTY_VALID_P(N) (REG_QTY (N) >= 0)
482
483 /* Compare table_elt X and Y and return true iff X is cheaper than Y. */
484
485 #define CHEAPER(X, Y) \
486 (preferable ((X)->cost, (X)->regcost, (Y)->cost, (Y)->regcost) < 0)
487
488 static struct table_elt *table[HASH_SIZE];
489
490 /* Chain of `struct table_elt's made so far for this function
491 but currently removed from the table. */
492
493 static struct table_elt *free_element_chain;
494
495 /* Trace a patch through the CFG. */
496
497 struct branch_path
498 {
499 /* The basic block for this path entry. */
500 basic_block bb;
501 };
502
503 /* This data describes a block that will be processed by
504 cse_extended_basic_block. */
505
506 struct cse_basic_block_data
507 {
508 /* Total number of SETs in block. */
509 int nsets;
510 /* Size of current branch path, if any. */
511 int path_size;
512 /* Current path, indicating which basic_blocks will be processed. */
513 struct branch_path *path;
514 };
515
516
517 /* Pointers to the live in/live out bitmaps for the boundaries of the
518 current EBB. */
519 static bitmap cse_ebb_live_in, cse_ebb_live_out;
520
521 /* A simple bitmap to track which basic blocks have been visited
522 already as part of an already processed extended basic block. */
523 static sbitmap cse_visited_basic_blocks;
524
525 static bool fixed_base_plus_p (rtx x);
526 static int notreg_cost (rtx, machine_mode, enum rtx_code, int);
527 static int preferable (int, int, int, int);
528 static void new_basic_block (void);
529 static void make_new_qty (unsigned int, machine_mode);
530 static void make_regs_eqv (unsigned int, unsigned int);
531 static void delete_reg_equiv (unsigned int);
532 static int mention_regs (rtx);
533 static int insert_regs (rtx, struct table_elt *, int);
534 static void remove_from_table (struct table_elt *, unsigned);
535 static void remove_pseudo_from_table (rtx, unsigned);
536 static struct table_elt *lookup (rtx, unsigned, machine_mode);
537 static struct table_elt *lookup_for_remove (rtx, unsigned, machine_mode);
538 static rtx lookup_as_function (rtx, enum rtx_code);
539 static struct table_elt *insert_with_costs (rtx, struct table_elt *, unsigned,
540 machine_mode, int, int);
541 static struct table_elt *insert (rtx, struct table_elt *, unsigned,
542 machine_mode);
543 static void merge_equiv_classes (struct table_elt *, struct table_elt *);
544 static void invalidate (rtx, machine_mode);
545 static void remove_invalid_refs (unsigned int);
546 static void remove_invalid_subreg_refs (unsigned int, poly_uint64,
547 machine_mode);
548 static void rehash_using_reg (rtx);
549 static void invalidate_memory (void);
550 static rtx use_related_value (rtx, struct table_elt *);
551
552 static inline unsigned canon_hash (rtx, machine_mode);
553 static inline unsigned safe_hash (rtx, machine_mode);
554 static inline unsigned hash_rtx_string (const char *);
555
556 static rtx canon_reg (rtx, rtx_insn *);
557 static enum rtx_code find_comparison_args (enum rtx_code, rtx *, rtx *,
558 machine_mode *,
559 machine_mode *);
560 static rtx fold_rtx (rtx, rtx_insn *);
561 static rtx equiv_constant (rtx);
562 static void record_jump_equiv (rtx_insn *, bool);
563 static void record_jump_cond (enum rtx_code, machine_mode, rtx, rtx,
564 int);
565 static void cse_insn (rtx_insn *);
566 static void cse_prescan_path (struct cse_basic_block_data *);
567 static void invalidate_from_clobbers (rtx_insn *);
568 static void invalidate_from_sets_and_clobbers (rtx_insn *);
569 static void cse_extended_basic_block (struct cse_basic_block_data *);
570 extern void dump_class (struct table_elt*);
571 static void get_cse_reg_info_1 (unsigned int regno);
572 static struct cse_reg_info * get_cse_reg_info (unsigned int regno);
573
574 static void flush_hash_table (void);
575 static bool insn_live_p (rtx_insn *, int *);
576 static bool set_live_p (rtx, int *);
577 static void cse_change_cc_mode_insn (rtx_insn *, rtx);
578 static void cse_change_cc_mode_insns (rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx);
579 static machine_mode cse_cc_succs (basic_block, basic_block, rtx, rtx,
580 bool);
581
582
584 #undef RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART
585 #define RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART gen_lowpart_if_possible
586
587 static const struct rtl_hooks cse_rtl_hooks = RTL_HOOKS_INITIALIZER;
588
589 /* Nonzero if X has the form (PLUS frame-pointer integer). */
591
592 static bool
593 fixed_base_plus_p (rtx x)
594 {
595 switch (GET_CODE (x))
596 {
597 case REG:
598 if (x == frame_pointer_rtx || x == hard_frame_pointer_rtx)
599 return true;
600 if (x == arg_pointer_rtx && fixed_regs[ARG_POINTER_REGNUM])
601 return true;
602 return false;
603
604 case PLUS:
605 if (!CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
606 return false;
607 return fixed_base_plus_p (XEXP (x, 0));
608
609 default:
610 return false;
611 }
612 }
613
614 /* Dump the expressions in the equivalence class indicated by CLASSP.
615 This function is used only for debugging. */
616 DEBUG_FUNCTION void
617 dump_class (struct table_elt *classp)
618 {
619 struct table_elt *elt;
620
621 fprintf (stderr, "Equivalence chain for ");
622 print_rtl (stderr, classp->exp);
623 fprintf (stderr, ": \n");
624
625 for (elt = classp->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
626 {
627 print_rtl (stderr, elt->exp);
628 fprintf (stderr, "\n");
629 }
630 }
631
632 /* Return an estimate of the cost of the registers used in an rtx.
633 This is mostly the number of different REG expressions in the rtx;
634 however for some exceptions like fixed registers we use a cost of
635 0. If any other hard register reference occurs, return MAX_COST. */
636
637 static int
638 approx_reg_cost (const_rtx x)
639 {
640 int cost = 0;
641 subrtx_iterator::array_type array;
642 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter, array, x, NONCONST)
643 {
644 const_rtx x = *iter;
645 if (REG_P (x))
646 {
647 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
648 if (!CHEAP_REGNO (regno))
649 {
650 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
651 {
652 if (targetm.small_register_classes_for_mode_p (GET_MODE (x)))
653 return MAX_COST;
654 cost += 2;
655 }
656 else
657 cost += 1;
658 }
659 }
660 }
661 return cost;
662 }
663
664 /* Return a negative value if an rtx A, whose costs are given by COST_A
665 and REGCOST_A, is more desirable than an rtx B.
666 Return a positive value if A is less desirable, or 0 if the two are
667 equally good. */
668 static int
669 preferable (int cost_a, int regcost_a, int cost_b, int regcost_b)
670 {
671 /* First, get rid of cases involving expressions that are entirely
672 unwanted. */
673 if (cost_a != cost_b)
674 {
675 if (cost_a == MAX_COST)
676 return 1;
677 if (cost_b == MAX_COST)
678 return -1;
679 }
680
681 /* Avoid extending lifetimes of hardregs. */
682 if (regcost_a != regcost_b)
683 {
684 if (regcost_a == MAX_COST)
685 return 1;
686 if (regcost_b == MAX_COST)
687 return -1;
688 }
689
690 /* Normal operation costs take precedence. */
691 if (cost_a != cost_b)
692 return cost_a - cost_b;
693 /* Only if these are identical consider effects on register pressure. */
694 if (regcost_a != regcost_b)
695 return regcost_a - regcost_b;
696 return 0;
697 }
698
699 /* Internal function, to compute cost when X is not a register; called
700 from COST macro to keep it simple. */
701
702 static int
703 notreg_cost (rtx x, machine_mode mode, enum rtx_code outer, int opno)
704 {
705 scalar_int_mode int_mode, inner_mode;
706 return ((GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
707 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
708 && is_int_mode (mode, &int_mode)
709 && is_int_mode (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)), &inner_mode)
710 && GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode)
711 && subreg_lowpart_p (x)
712 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (int_mode, inner_mode))
713 ? 0
714 : rtx_cost (x, mode, outer, opno, optimize_this_for_speed_p) * 2);
715 }
716
717
718 /* Initialize CSE_REG_INFO_TABLE. */
720
721 static void
722 init_cse_reg_info (unsigned int nregs)
723 {
724 /* Do we need to grow the table? */
725 if (nregs > cse_reg_info_table_size)
726 {
727 unsigned int new_size;
728
729 if (cse_reg_info_table_size < 2048)
730 {
731 /* Compute a new size that is a power of 2 and no smaller
732 than the large of NREGS and 64. */
733 new_size = (cse_reg_info_table_size
734 ? cse_reg_info_table_size : 64);
735
736 while (new_size < nregs)
737 new_size *= 2;
738 }
739 else
740 {
741 /* If we need a big table, allocate just enough to hold
742 NREGS registers. */
743 new_size = nregs;
744 }
745
746 /* Reallocate the table with NEW_SIZE entries. */
747 free (cse_reg_info_table);
748 cse_reg_info_table = XNEWVEC (struct cse_reg_info, new_size);
749 cse_reg_info_table_size = new_size;
750 cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized = 0;
751 }
752
753 /* Do we have all of the first NREGS entries initialized? */
754 if (cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized < nregs)
755 {
756 unsigned int old_timestamp = cse_reg_info_timestamp - 1;
757 unsigned int i;
758
759 /* Put the old timestamp on newly allocated entries so that they
760 will all be considered out of date. We do not touch those
761 entries beyond the first NREGS entries to be nice to the
762 virtual memory. */
763 for (i = cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized; i < nregs; i++)
764 cse_reg_info_table[i].timestamp = old_timestamp;
765
766 cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized = nregs;
767 }
768 }
769
770 /* Given REGNO, initialize the cse_reg_info entry for REGNO. */
771
772 static void
773 get_cse_reg_info_1 (unsigned int regno)
774 {
775 /* Set TIMESTAMP field to CSE_REG_INFO_TIMESTAMP so that this
776 entry will be considered to have been initialized. */
777 cse_reg_info_table[regno].timestamp = cse_reg_info_timestamp;
778
779 /* Initialize the rest of the entry. */
780 cse_reg_info_table[regno].reg_tick = 1;
781 cse_reg_info_table[regno].reg_in_table = -1;
782 cse_reg_info_table[regno].subreg_ticked = -1;
783 cse_reg_info_table[regno].reg_qty = -regno - 1;
784 }
785
786 /* Find a cse_reg_info entry for REGNO. */
787
788 static inline struct cse_reg_info *
789 get_cse_reg_info (unsigned int regno)
790 {
791 struct cse_reg_info *p = &cse_reg_info_table[regno];
792
793 /* If this entry has not been initialized, go ahead and initialize
794 it. */
795 if (p->timestamp != cse_reg_info_timestamp)
796 get_cse_reg_info_1 (regno);
797
798 return p;
799 }
800
801 /* Clear the hash table and initialize each register with its own quantity,
802 for a new basic block. */
803
804 static void
805 new_basic_block (void)
806 {
807 int i;
808
809 next_qty = 0;
810
811 /* Invalidate cse_reg_info_table. */
812 cse_reg_info_timestamp++;
813
814 /* Clear out hash table state for this pass. */
815 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (hard_regs_in_table);
816
817 /* The per-quantity values used to be initialized here, but it is
818 much faster to initialize each as it is made in `make_new_qty'. */
819
820 for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
821 {
822 struct table_elt *first;
823
824 first = table[i];
825 if (first != NULL)
826 {
827 struct table_elt *last = first;
828
829 table[i] = NULL;
830
831 while (last->next_same_hash != NULL)
832 last = last->next_same_hash;
833
834 /* Now relink this hash entire chain into
835 the free element list. */
836
837 last->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
838 free_element_chain = first;
839 }
840 }
841 }
842
843 /* Say that register REG contains a quantity in mode MODE not in any
844 register before and initialize that quantity. */
845
846 static void
847 make_new_qty (unsigned int reg, machine_mode mode)
848 {
849 int q;
850 struct qty_table_elem *ent;
851 struct reg_eqv_elem *eqv;
852
853 gcc_assert (next_qty < max_qty);
854
855 q = REG_QTY (reg) = next_qty++;
856 ent = &qty_table[q];
857 ent->first_reg = reg;
858 ent->last_reg = reg;
859 ent->mode = mode;
860 ent->const_rtx = ent->const_insn = NULL;
861 ent->comparison_code = UNKNOWN;
862
863 eqv = ®_eqv_table[reg];
864 eqv->next = eqv->prev = -1;
865 }
866
867 /* Make reg NEW equivalent to reg OLD.
868 OLD is not changing; NEW is. */
869
870 static void
871 make_regs_eqv (unsigned int new_reg, unsigned int old_reg)
872 {
873 unsigned int lastr, firstr;
874 int q = REG_QTY (old_reg);
875 struct qty_table_elem *ent;
876
877 ent = &qty_table[q];
878
879 /* Nothing should become eqv until it has a "non-invalid" qty number. */
880 gcc_assert (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (old_reg));
881
882 REG_QTY (new_reg) = q;
883 firstr = ent->first_reg;
884 lastr = ent->last_reg;
885
886 /* Prefer fixed hard registers to anything. Prefer pseudo regs to other
887 hard regs. Among pseudos, if NEW will live longer than any other reg
888 of the same qty, and that is beyond the current basic block,
889 make it the new canonical replacement for this qty. */
890 if (! (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (firstr))
891 /* Certain fixed registers might be of the class NO_REGS. This means
892 that not only can they not be allocated by the compiler, but
893 they cannot be used in substitutions or canonicalizations
894 either. */
895 && (new_reg >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || REGNO_REG_CLASS (new_reg) != NO_REGS)
896 && ((new_reg < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (new_reg))
897 || (new_reg >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
898 && (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
899 || (bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_out, new_reg)
900 && !bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_out, firstr))
901 || (bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_in, new_reg)
902 && !bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_in, firstr))))))
903 {
904 reg_eqv_table[firstr].prev = new_reg;
905 reg_eqv_table[new_reg].next = firstr;
906 reg_eqv_table[new_reg].prev = -1;
907 ent->first_reg = new_reg;
908 }
909 else
910 {
911 /* If NEW is a hard reg (known to be non-fixed), insert at end.
912 Otherwise, insert before any non-fixed hard regs that are at the
913 end. Registers of class NO_REGS cannot be used as an
914 equivalent for anything. */
915 while (lastr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_eqv_table[lastr].prev >= 0
916 && (REGNO_REG_CLASS (lastr) == NO_REGS || ! FIXED_REGNO_P (lastr))
917 && new_reg >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
918 lastr = reg_eqv_table[lastr].prev;
919 reg_eqv_table[new_reg].next = reg_eqv_table[lastr].next;
920 if (reg_eqv_table[lastr].next >= 0)
921 reg_eqv_table[reg_eqv_table[lastr].next].prev = new_reg;
922 else
923 qty_table[q].last_reg = new_reg;
924 reg_eqv_table[lastr].next = new_reg;
925 reg_eqv_table[new_reg].prev = lastr;
926 }
927 }
928
929 /* Remove REG from its equivalence class. */
930
931 static void
932 delete_reg_equiv (unsigned int reg)
933 {
934 struct qty_table_elem *ent;
935 int q = REG_QTY (reg);
936 int p, n;
937
938 /* If invalid, do nothing. */
939 if (! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (reg))
940 return;
941
942 ent = &qty_table[q];
943
944 p = reg_eqv_table[reg].prev;
945 n = reg_eqv_table[reg].next;
946
947 if (n != -1)
948 reg_eqv_table[n].prev = p;
949 else
950 ent->last_reg = p;
951 if (p != -1)
952 reg_eqv_table[p].next = n;
953 else
954 ent->first_reg = n;
955
956 REG_QTY (reg) = -reg - 1;
957 }
958
959 /* Remove any invalid expressions from the hash table
960 that refer to any of the registers contained in expression X.
961
962 Make sure that newly inserted references to those registers
963 as subexpressions will be considered valid.
964
965 mention_regs is not called when a register itself
966 is being stored in the table.
967
968 Return 1 if we have done something that may have changed the hash code
969 of X. */
970
971 static int
972 mention_regs (rtx x)
973 {
974 enum rtx_code code;
975 int i, j;
976 const char *fmt;
977 int changed = 0;
978
979 if (x == 0)
980 return 0;
981
982 code = GET_CODE (x);
983 if (code == REG)
984 {
985 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
986 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
987 unsigned int i;
988
989 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
990 {
991 if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) >= 0 && REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i))
992 remove_invalid_refs (i);
993
994 REG_IN_TABLE (i) = REG_TICK (i);
995 SUBREG_TICKED (i) = -1;
996 }
997
998 return 0;
999 }
1000
1001 /* If this is a SUBREG, we don't want to discard other SUBREGs of the same
1002 pseudo if they don't use overlapping words. We handle only pseudos
1003 here for simplicity. */
1004 if (code == SUBREG && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
1005 && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1006 {
1007 unsigned int i = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
1008
1009 if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) >= 0 && REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i))
1010 {
1011 /* If REG_IN_TABLE (i) differs from REG_TICK (i) by one, and
1012 the last store to this register really stored into this
1013 subreg, then remove the memory of this subreg.
1014 Otherwise, remove any memory of the entire register and
1015 all its subregs from the table. */
1016 if (REG_TICK (i) - REG_IN_TABLE (i) > 1
1017 || SUBREG_TICKED (i) != REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)))
1018 remove_invalid_refs (i);
1019 else
1020 remove_invalid_subreg_refs (i, SUBREG_BYTE (x), GET_MODE (x));
1021 }
1022
1023 REG_IN_TABLE (i) = REG_TICK (i);
1024 SUBREG_TICKED (i) = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
1025 return 0;
1026 }
1027
1028 /* If X is a comparison or a COMPARE and either operand is a register
1029 that does not have a quantity, give it one. This is so that a later
1030 call to record_jump_equiv won't cause X to be assigned a different
1031 hash code and not found in the table after that call.
1032
1033 It is not necessary to do this here, since rehash_using_reg can
1034 fix up the table later, but doing this here eliminates the need to
1035 call that expensive function in the most common case where the only
1036 use of the register is in the comparison. */
1037
1038 if (code == COMPARE || COMPARISON_P (x))
1039 {
1040 if (REG_P (XEXP (x, 0))
1041 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))))
1042 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 0), NULL, 0))
1043 {
1044 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 0));
1045 changed = 1;
1046 }
1047
1048 if (REG_P (XEXP (x, 1))
1049 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 1))))
1050 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 1), NULL, 0))
1051 {
1052 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 1));
1053 changed = 1;
1054 }
1055 }
1056
1057 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
1058 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
1059 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
1060 changed |= mention_regs (XEXP (x, i));
1061 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
1062 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
1063 changed |= mention_regs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
1064
1065 return changed;
1066 }
1067
1068 /* Update the register quantities for inserting X into the hash table
1069 with a value equivalent to CLASSP.
1070 (If the class does not contain a REG, it is irrelevant.)
1071 If MODIFIED is nonzero, X is a destination; it is being modified.
1072 Note that delete_reg_equiv should be called on a register
1073 before insert_regs is done on that register with MODIFIED != 0.
1074
1075 Nonzero value means that elements of reg_qty have changed
1076 so X's hash code may be different. */
1077
1078 static int
1079 insert_regs (rtx x, struct table_elt *classp, int modified)
1080 {
1081 if (REG_P (x))
1082 {
1083 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
1084 int qty_valid;
1085
1086 /* If REGNO is in the equivalence table already but is of the
1087 wrong mode for that equivalence, don't do anything here. */
1088
1089 qty_valid = REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno);
1090 if (qty_valid)
1091 {
1092 struct qty_table_elem *ent = &qty_table[REG_QTY (regno)];
1093
1094 if (ent->mode != GET_MODE (x))
1095 return 0;
1096 }
1097
1098 if (modified || ! qty_valid)
1099 {
1100 if (classp)
1101 for (classp = classp->first_same_value;
1102 classp != 0;
1103 classp = classp->next_same_value)
1104 if (REG_P (classp->exp)
1105 && GET_MODE (classp->exp) == GET_MODE (x))
1106 {
1107 unsigned c_regno = REGNO (classp->exp);
1108
1109 gcc_assert (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (c_regno));
1110
1111 /* Suppose that 5 is hard reg and 100 and 101 are
1112 pseudos. Consider
1113
1114 (set (reg:si 100) (reg:si 5))
1115 (set (reg:si 5) (reg:si 100))
1116 (set (reg:di 101) (reg:di 5))
1117
1118 We would now set REG_QTY (101) = REG_QTY (5), but the
1119 entry for 5 is in SImode. When we use this later in
1120 copy propagation, we get the register in wrong mode. */
1121 if (qty_table[REG_QTY (c_regno)].mode != GET_MODE (x))
1122 continue;
1123
1124 make_regs_eqv (regno, c_regno);
1125 return 1;
1126 }
1127
1128 /* Mention_regs for a SUBREG checks if REG_TICK is exactly one larger
1129 than REG_IN_TABLE to find out if there was only a single preceding
1130 invalidation - for the SUBREG - or another one, which would be
1131 for the full register. However, if we find here that REG_TICK
1132 indicates that the register is invalid, it means that it has
1133 been invalidated in a separate operation. The SUBREG might be used
1134 now (then this is a recursive call), or we might use the full REG
1135 now and a SUBREG of it later. So bump up REG_TICK so that
1136 mention_regs will do the right thing. */
1137 if (! modified
1138 && REG_IN_TABLE (regno) >= 0
1139 && REG_TICK (regno) == REG_IN_TABLE (regno) + 1)
1140 REG_TICK (regno)++;
1141 make_new_qty (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1142 return 1;
1143 }
1144
1145 return 0;
1146 }
1147
1148 /* If X is a SUBREG, we will likely be inserting the inner register in the
1149 table. If that register doesn't have an assigned quantity number at
1150 this point but does later, the insertion that we will be doing now will
1151 not be accessible because its hash code will have changed. So assign
1152 a quantity number now. */
1153
1154 else if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
1155 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x))))
1156 {
1157 insert_regs (SUBREG_REG (x), NULL, 0);
1158 mention_regs (x);
1159 return 1;
1160 }
1161 else
1162 return mention_regs (x);
1163 }
1164
1165
1167 /* Compute upper and lower anchors for CST. Also compute the offset of CST
1168 from these anchors/bases such that *_BASE + *_OFFS = CST. Return false iff
1169 CST is equal to an anchor. */
1170
1171 static bool
1172 compute_const_anchors (rtx cst,
1173 HOST_WIDE_INT *lower_base, HOST_WIDE_INT *lower_offs,
1174 HOST_WIDE_INT *upper_base, HOST_WIDE_INT *upper_offs)
1175 {
1176 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT n = UINTVAL (cst);
1177
1178 *lower_base = n & ~(targetm.const_anchor - 1);
1179 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) *lower_base == n)
1180 return false;
1181
1182 *upper_base = ((n + (targetm.const_anchor - 1))
1183 & ~(targetm.const_anchor - 1));
1184 *upper_offs = n - *upper_base;
1185 *lower_offs = n - *lower_base;
1186 return true;
1187 }
1188
1189 /* Insert the equivalence between ANCHOR and (REG + OFF) in mode MODE. */
1190
1191 static void
1192 insert_const_anchor (HOST_WIDE_INT anchor, rtx reg, HOST_WIDE_INT offs,
1193 machine_mode mode)
1194 {
1195 struct table_elt *elt;
1196 unsigned hash;
1197 rtx anchor_exp;
1198 rtx exp;
1199
1200 anchor_exp = gen_int_mode (anchor, mode);
1201 hash = HASH (anchor_exp, mode);
1202 elt = lookup (anchor_exp, hash, mode);
1203 if (!elt)
1204 elt = insert (anchor_exp, NULL, hash, mode);
1205
1206 exp = plus_constant (mode, reg, offs);
1207 /* REG has just been inserted and the hash codes recomputed. */
1208 mention_regs (exp);
1209 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1210
1211 /* Use the cost of the register rather than the whole expression. When
1212 looking up constant anchors we will further offset the corresponding
1213 expression therefore it does not make sense to prefer REGs over
1214 reg-immediate additions. Prefer instead the oldest expression. Also
1215 don't prefer pseudos over hard regs so that we derive constants in
1216 argument registers from other argument registers rather than from the
1217 original pseudo that was used to synthesize the constant. */
1218 insert_with_costs (exp, elt, hash, mode, COST (reg, mode), 1);
1219 }
1220
1221 /* The constant CST is equivalent to the register REG. Create
1222 equivalences between the two anchors of CST and the corresponding
1223 register-offset expressions using REG. */
1224
1225 static void
1226 insert_const_anchors (rtx reg, rtx cst, machine_mode mode)
1227 {
1228 HOST_WIDE_INT lower_base, lower_offs, upper_base, upper_offs;
1229
1230 if (!compute_const_anchors (cst, &lower_base, &lower_offs,
1231 &upper_base, &upper_offs))
1232 return;
1233
1234 /* Ignore anchors of value 0. Constants accessible from zero are
1235 simple. */
1236 if (lower_base != 0)
1237 insert_const_anchor (lower_base, reg, -lower_offs, mode);
1238
1239 if (upper_base != 0)
1240 insert_const_anchor (upper_base, reg, -upper_offs, mode);
1241 }
1242
1243 /* We need to express ANCHOR_ELT->exp + OFFS. Walk the equivalence list of
1244 ANCHOR_ELT and see if offsetting any of the entries by OFFS would create a
1245 valid expression. Return the cheapest and oldest of such expressions. In
1246 *OLD, return how old the resulting expression is compared to the other
1247 equivalent expressions. */
1248
1249 static rtx
1250 find_reg_offset_for_const (struct table_elt *anchor_elt, HOST_WIDE_INT offs,
1251 unsigned *old)
1252 {
1253 struct table_elt *elt;
1254 unsigned idx;
1255 struct table_elt *match_elt;
1256 rtx match;
1257
1258 /* Find the cheapest and *oldest* expression to maximize the chance of
1259 reusing the same pseudo. */
1260
1261 match_elt = NULL;
1262 match = NULL_RTX;
1263 for (elt = anchor_elt->first_same_value, idx = 0;
1264 elt;
1265 elt = elt->next_same_value, idx++)
1266 {
1267 if (match_elt && CHEAPER (match_elt, elt))
1268 return match;
1269
1270 if (REG_P (elt->exp)
1271 || (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == PLUS
1272 && REG_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 0))
1273 && GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)) == CONST_INT))
1274 {
1275 rtx x;
1276
1277 /* Ignore expressions that are no longer valid. */
1278 if (!REG_P (elt->exp) && !exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, false))
1279 continue;
1280
1281 x = plus_constant (GET_MODE (elt->exp), elt->exp, offs);
1282 if (REG_P (x)
1283 || (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS
1284 && IN_RANGE (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)),
1285 -targetm.const_anchor,
1286 targetm.const_anchor - 1)))
1287 {
1288 match = x;
1289 match_elt = elt;
1290 *old = idx;
1291 }
1292 }
1293 }
1294
1295 return match;
1296 }
1297
1298 /* Try to express the constant SRC_CONST using a register+offset expression
1299 derived from a constant anchor. Return it if successful or NULL_RTX,
1300 otherwise. */
1301
1302 static rtx
1303 try_const_anchors (rtx src_const, machine_mode mode)
1304 {
1305 struct table_elt *lower_elt, *upper_elt;
1306 HOST_WIDE_INT lower_base, lower_offs, upper_base, upper_offs;
1307 rtx lower_anchor_rtx, upper_anchor_rtx;
1308 rtx lower_exp = NULL_RTX, upper_exp = NULL_RTX;
1309 unsigned lower_old, upper_old;
1310
1311 /* CONST_INT is used for CC modes, but we should leave those alone. */
1312 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_CC)
1313 return NULL_RTX;
1314
1315 gcc_assert (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode));
1316 if (!compute_const_anchors (src_const, &lower_base, &lower_offs,
1317 &upper_base, &upper_offs))
1318 return NULL_RTX;
1319
1320 lower_anchor_rtx = GEN_INT (lower_base);
1321 upper_anchor_rtx = GEN_INT (upper_base);
1322 lower_elt = lookup (lower_anchor_rtx, HASH (lower_anchor_rtx, mode), mode);
1323 upper_elt = lookup (upper_anchor_rtx, HASH (upper_anchor_rtx, mode), mode);
1324
1325 if (lower_elt)
1326 lower_exp = find_reg_offset_for_const (lower_elt, lower_offs, &lower_old);
1327 if (upper_elt)
1328 upper_exp = find_reg_offset_for_const (upper_elt, upper_offs, &upper_old);
1329
1330 if (!lower_exp)
1331 return upper_exp;
1332 if (!upper_exp)
1333 return lower_exp;
1334
1335 /* Return the older expression. */
1336 return (upper_old > lower_old ? upper_exp : lower_exp);
1337 }
1338
1339 /* Look in or update the hash table. */
1341
1342 /* Remove table element ELT from use in the table.
1343 HASH is its hash code, made using the HASH macro.
1344 It's an argument because often that is known in advance
1345 and we save much time not recomputing it. */
1346
1347 static void
1348 remove_from_table (struct table_elt *elt, unsigned int hash)
1349 {
1350 if (elt == 0)
1351 return;
1352
1353 /* Mark this element as removed. See cse_insn. */
1354 elt->first_same_value = 0;
1355
1356 /* Remove the table element from its equivalence class. */
1357
1358 {
1359 struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_value;
1360 struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_value;
1361
1362 if (next)
1363 next->prev_same_value = prev;
1364
1365 if (prev)
1366 prev->next_same_value = next;
1367 else
1368 {
1369 struct table_elt *newfirst = next;
1370 while (next)
1371 {
1372 next->first_same_value = newfirst;
1373 next = next->next_same_value;
1374 }
1375 }
1376 }
1377
1378 /* Remove the table element from its hash bucket. */
1379
1380 {
1381 struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_hash;
1382 struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_hash;
1383
1384 if (next)
1385 next->prev_same_hash = prev;
1386
1387 if (prev)
1388 prev->next_same_hash = next;
1389 else if (table[hash] == elt)
1390 table[hash] = next;
1391 else
1392 {
1393 /* This entry is not in the proper hash bucket. This can happen
1394 when two classes were merged by `merge_equiv_classes'. Search
1395 for the hash bucket that it heads. This happens only very
1396 rarely, so the cost is acceptable. */
1397 for (hash = 0; hash < HASH_SIZE; hash++)
1398 if (table[hash] == elt)
1399 table[hash] = next;
1400 }
1401 }
1402
1403 /* Remove the table element from its related-value circular chain. */
1404
1405 if (elt->related_value != 0 && elt->related_value != elt)
1406 {
1407 struct table_elt *p = elt->related_value;
1408
1409 while (p->related_value != elt)
1410 p = p->related_value;
1411 p->related_value = elt->related_value;
1412 if (p->related_value == p)
1413 p->related_value = 0;
1414 }
1415
1416 /* Now add it to the free element chain. */
1417 elt->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
1418 free_element_chain = elt;
1419 }
1420
1421 /* Same as above, but X is a pseudo-register. */
1422
1423 static void
1424 remove_pseudo_from_table (rtx x, unsigned int hash)
1425 {
1426 struct table_elt *elt;
1427
1428 /* Because a pseudo-register can be referenced in more than one
1429 mode, we might have to remove more than one table entry. */
1430 while ((elt = lookup_for_remove (x, hash, VOIDmode)))
1431 remove_from_table (elt, hash);
1432 }
1433
1434 /* Look up X in the hash table and return its table element,
1435 or 0 if X is not in the table.
1436
1437 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1438 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1439
1440 Here we are satisfied to find an expression whose tree structure
1441 looks like X. */
1442
1443 static struct table_elt *
1444 lookup (rtx x, unsigned int hash, machine_mode mode)
1445 {
1446 struct table_elt *p;
1447
1448 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1449 if (mode == p->mode && ((x == p->exp && REG_P (x))
1450 || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, !REG_P (x), false)))
1451 return p;
1452
1453 return 0;
1454 }
1455
1456 /* Like `lookup' but don't care whether the table element uses invalid regs.
1457 Also ignore discrepancies in the machine mode of a register. */
1458
1459 static struct table_elt *
1460 lookup_for_remove (rtx x, unsigned int hash, machine_mode mode)
1461 {
1462 struct table_elt *p;
1463
1464 if (REG_P (x))
1465 {
1466 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
1467
1468 /* Don't check the machine mode when comparing registers;
1469 invalidating (REG:SI 0) also invalidates (REG:DF 0). */
1470 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1471 if (REG_P (p->exp)
1472 && REGNO (p->exp) == regno)
1473 return p;
1474 }
1475 else
1476 {
1477 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1478 if (mode == p->mode
1479 && (x == p->exp || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, 0, false)))
1480 return p;
1481 }
1482
1483 return 0;
1484 }
1485
1486 /* Look for an expression equivalent to X and with code CODE.
1487 If one is found, return that expression. */
1488
1489 static rtx
1490 lookup_as_function (rtx x, enum rtx_code code)
1491 {
1492 struct table_elt *p
1493 = lookup (x, SAFE_HASH (x, VOIDmode), GET_MODE (x));
1494
1495 if (p == 0)
1496 return 0;
1497
1498 for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1499 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == code
1500 /* Make sure this is a valid entry in the table. */
1501 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
1502 return p->exp;
1503
1504 return 0;
1505 }
1506
1507 /* Insert X in the hash table, assuming HASH is its hash code and
1508 CLASSP is an element of the class it should go in (or 0 if a new
1509 class should be made). COST is the code of X and reg_cost is the
1510 cost of registers in X. It is inserted at the proper position to
1511 keep the class in the order cheapest first.
1512
1513 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1514 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1515
1516 For elements of equal cheapness, the most recent one
1517 goes in front, except that the first element in the list
1518 remains first unless a cheaper element is added. The order of
1519 pseudo-registers does not matter, as canon_reg will be called to
1520 find the cheapest when a register is retrieved from the table.
1521
1522 The in_memory field in the hash table element is set to 0.
1523 The caller must set it nonzero if appropriate.
1524
1525 You should call insert_regs (X, CLASSP, MODIFY) before calling here,
1526 and if insert_regs returns a nonzero value
1527 you must then recompute its hash code before calling here.
1528
1529 If necessary, update table showing constant values of quantities. */
1530
1531 static struct table_elt *
1532 insert_with_costs (rtx x, struct table_elt *classp, unsigned int hash,
1533 machine_mode mode, int cost, int reg_cost)
1534 {
1535 struct table_elt *elt;
1536
1537 /* If X is a register and we haven't made a quantity for it,
1538 something is wrong. */
1539 gcc_assert (!REG_P (x) || REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)));
1540
1541 /* If X is a hard register, show it is being put in the table. */
1542 if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1543 add_to_hard_reg_set (&hard_regs_in_table, GET_MODE (x), REGNO (x));
1544
1545 /* Put an element for X into the right hash bucket. */
1546
1547 elt = free_element_chain;
1548 if (elt)
1549 free_element_chain = elt->next_same_hash;
1550 else
1551 elt = XNEW (struct table_elt);
1552
1553 elt->exp = x;
1554 elt->canon_exp = NULL_RTX;
1555 elt->cost = cost;
1556 elt->regcost = reg_cost;
1557 elt->next_same_value = 0;
1558 elt->prev_same_value = 0;
1559 elt->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1560 elt->prev_same_hash = 0;
1561 elt->related_value = 0;
1562 elt->in_memory = 0;
1563 elt->mode = mode;
1564 elt->is_const = (CONSTANT_P (x) || fixed_base_plus_p (x));
1565
1566 if (table[hash])
1567 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = elt;
1568 table[hash] = elt;
1569
1570 /* Put it into the proper value-class. */
1571 if (classp)
1572 {
1573 classp = classp->first_same_value;
1574 if (CHEAPER (elt, classp))
1575 /* Insert at the head of the class. */
1576 {
1577 struct table_elt *p;
1578 elt->next_same_value = classp;
1579 classp->prev_same_value = elt;
1580 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1581
1582 for (p = classp; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1583 p->first_same_value = elt;
1584 }
1585 else
1586 {
1587 /* Insert not at head of the class. */
1588 /* Put it after the last element cheaper than X. */
1589 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1590
1591 for (p = classp;
1592 (next = p->next_same_value) && CHEAPER (next, elt);
1593 p = next)
1594 ;
1595
1596 /* Put it after P and before NEXT. */
1597 elt->next_same_value = next;
1598 if (next)
1599 next->prev_same_value = elt;
1600
1601 elt->prev_same_value = p;
1602 p->next_same_value = elt;
1603 elt->first_same_value = classp;
1604 }
1605 }
1606 else
1607 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1608
1609 /* If this is a constant being set equivalent to a register or a register
1610 being set equivalent to a constant, note the constant equivalence.
1611
1612 If this is a constant, it cannot be equivalent to a different constant,
1613 and a constant is the only thing that can be cheaper than a register. So
1614 we know the register is the head of the class (before the constant was
1615 inserted).
1616
1617 If this is a register that is not already known equivalent to a
1618 constant, we must check the entire class.
1619
1620 If this is a register that is already known equivalent to an insn,
1621 update the qtys `const_insn' to show that `this_insn' is the latest
1622 insn making that quantity equivalent to the constant. */
1623
1624 if (elt->is_const && classp && REG_P (classp->exp)
1625 && !REG_P (x))
1626 {
1627 int exp_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (classp->exp));
1628 struct qty_table_elem *exp_ent = &qty_table[exp_q];
1629
1630 exp_ent->const_rtx = gen_lowpart (exp_ent->mode, x);
1631 exp_ent->const_insn = this_insn;
1632 }
1633
1634 else if (REG_P (x)
1635 && classp
1636 && ! qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].const_rtx
1637 && ! elt->is_const)
1638 {
1639 struct table_elt *p;
1640
1641 for (p = classp; p != 0; p = p->next_same_value)
1642 {
1643 if (p->is_const && !REG_P (p->exp))
1644 {
1645 int x_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
1646 struct qty_table_elem *x_ent = &qty_table[x_q];
1647
1648 x_ent->const_rtx
1649 = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), p->exp);
1650 x_ent->const_insn = this_insn;
1651 break;
1652 }
1653 }
1654 }
1655
1656 else if (REG_P (x)
1657 && qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].const_rtx
1658 && GET_MODE (x) == qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].mode)
1659 qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].const_insn = this_insn;
1660
1661 /* If this is a constant with symbolic value,
1662 and it has a term with an explicit integer value,
1663 link it up with related expressions. */
1664 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1665 {
1666 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
1667 unsigned subhash;
1668 struct table_elt *subelt, *subelt_prev;
1669
1670 if (subexp != 0)
1671 {
1672 /* Get the integer-free subexpression in the hash table. */
1673 subhash = SAFE_HASH (subexp, mode);
1674 subelt = lookup (subexp, subhash, mode);
1675 if (subelt == 0)
1676 subelt = insert (subexp, NULL, subhash, mode);
1677 /* Initialize SUBELT's circular chain if it has none. */
1678 if (subelt->related_value == 0)
1679 subelt->related_value = subelt;
1680 /* Find the element in the circular chain that precedes SUBELT. */
1681 subelt_prev = subelt;
1682 while (subelt_prev->related_value != subelt)
1683 subelt_prev = subelt_prev->related_value;
1684 /* Put new ELT into SUBELT's circular chain just before SUBELT.
1685 This way the element that follows SUBELT is the oldest one. */
1686 elt->related_value = subelt_prev->related_value;
1687 subelt_prev->related_value = elt;
1688 }
1689 }
1690
1691 return elt;
1692 }
1693
1694 /* Wrap insert_with_costs by passing the default costs. */
1695
1696 static struct table_elt *
1697 insert (rtx x, struct table_elt *classp, unsigned int hash,
1698 machine_mode mode)
1699 {
1700 return insert_with_costs (x, classp, hash, mode,
1701 COST (x, mode), approx_reg_cost (x));
1702 }
1703
1704
1705 /* Given two equivalence classes, CLASS1 and CLASS2, put all the entries from
1707 CLASS2 into CLASS1. This is done when we have reached an insn which makes
1708 the two classes equivalent.
1709
1710 CLASS1 will be the surviving class; CLASS2 should not be used after this
1711 call.
1712
1713 Any invalid entries in CLASS2 will not be copied. */
1714
1715 static void
1716 merge_equiv_classes (struct table_elt *class1, struct table_elt *class2)
1717 {
1718 struct table_elt *elt, *next, *new_elt;
1719
1720 /* Ensure we start with the head of the classes. */
1721 class1 = class1->first_same_value;
1722 class2 = class2->first_same_value;
1723
1724 /* If they were already equal, forget it. */
1725 if (class1 == class2)
1726 return;
1727
1728 for (elt = class2; elt; elt = next)
1729 {
1730 unsigned int hash;
1731 rtx exp = elt->exp;
1732 machine_mode mode = elt->mode;
1733
1734 next = elt->next_same_value;
1735
1736 /* Remove old entry, make a new one in CLASS1's class.
1737 Don't do this for invalid entries as we cannot find their
1738 hash code (it also isn't necessary). */
1739 if (REG_P (exp) || exp_equiv_p (exp, exp, 1, false))
1740 {
1741 bool need_rehash = false;
1742
1743 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
1744 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1745
1746 if (REG_P (exp))
1747 {
1748 need_rehash = REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (exp));
1749 delete_reg_equiv (REGNO (exp));
1750 }
1751
1752 if (REG_P (exp) && REGNO (exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1753 remove_pseudo_from_table (exp, hash);
1754 else
1755 remove_from_table (elt, hash);
1756
1757 if (insert_regs (exp, class1, 0) || need_rehash)
1758 {
1759 rehash_using_reg (exp);
1760 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1761 }
1762 new_elt = insert (exp, class1, hash, mode);
1763 new_elt->in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
1764 if (GET_CODE (exp) == ASM_OPERANDS && elt->cost == MAX_COST)
1765 new_elt->cost = MAX_COST;
1766 }
1767 }
1768 }
1769
1770 /* Flush the entire hash table. */
1772
1773 static void
1774 flush_hash_table (void)
1775 {
1776 int i;
1777 struct table_elt *p;
1778
1779 for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
1780 for (p = table[i]; p; p = table[i])
1781 {
1782 /* Note that invalidate can remove elements
1783 after P in the current hash chain. */
1784 if (REG_P (p->exp))
1785 invalidate (p->exp, VOIDmode);
1786 else
1787 remove_from_table (p, i);
1788 }
1789 }
1790
1791 /* Check whether an anti dependence exists between X and EXP. MODE and
1793 ADDR are as for canon_anti_dependence. */
1794
1795 static bool
1796 check_dependence (const_rtx x, rtx exp, machine_mode mode, rtx addr)
1797 {
1798 subrtx_iterator::array_type array;
1799 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter, array, x, NONCONST)
1800 {
1801 const_rtx x = *iter;
1802 if (MEM_P (x) && canon_anti_dependence (x, true, exp, mode, addr))
1803 return true;
1804 }
1805 return false;
1806 }
1807
1808 /* Remove from the hash table, or mark as invalid, all expressions whose
1809 values could be altered by storing in register X. */
1810
1811 static void
1812 invalidate_reg (rtx x)
1813 {
1814 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (x) == REG);
1815
1816 /* If X is a register, dependencies on its contents are recorded
1817 through the qty number mechanism. Just change the qty number of
1818 the register, mark it as invalid for expressions that refer to it,
1819 and remove it itself. */
1820 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
1821 unsigned int hash = HASH (x, GET_MODE (x));
1822
1823 /* Remove REGNO from any quantity list it might be on and indicate
1824 that its value might have changed. If it is a pseudo, remove its
1825 entry from the hash table.
1826
1827 For a hard register, we do the first two actions above for any
1828 additional hard registers corresponding to X. Then, if any of these
1829 registers are in the table, we must remove any REG entries that
1830 overlap these registers. */
1831
1832 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1833 REG_TICK (regno)++;
1834 SUBREG_TICKED (regno) = -1;
1835
1836 if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1837 remove_pseudo_from_table (x, hash);
1838 else
1839 {
1840 HOST_WIDE_INT in_table = TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1841 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
1842 unsigned int rn;
1843 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1844
1845 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1846
1847 for (rn = regno + 1; rn < endregno; rn++)
1848 {
1849 in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, rn);
1850 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, rn);
1851 delete_reg_equiv (rn);
1852 REG_TICK (rn)++;
1853 SUBREG_TICKED (rn) = -1;
1854 }
1855
1856 if (in_table)
1857 for (hash = 0; hash < HASH_SIZE; hash++)
1858 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1859 {
1860 next = p->next_same_hash;
1861
1862 if (!REG_P (p->exp) || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1863 continue;
1864
1865 unsigned int tregno = REGNO (p->exp);
1866 unsigned int tendregno = END_REGNO (p->exp);
1867 if (tendregno > regno && tregno < endregno)
1868 remove_from_table (p, hash);
1869 }
1870 }
1871 }
1872
1873 /* Remove from the hash table, or mark as invalid, all expressions whose
1874 values could be altered by storing in X. X is a register, a subreg, or
1875 a memory reference with nonvarying address (because, when a memory
1876 reference with a varying address is stored in, all memory references are
1877 removed by invalidate_memory so specific invalidation is superfluous).
1878 FULL_MODE, if not VOIDmode, indicates that this much should be
1879 invalidated instead of just the amount indicated by the mode of X. This
1880 is only used for bitfield stores into memory.
1881
1882 A nonvarying address may be just a register or just a symbol reference,
1883 or it may be either of those plus a numeric offset. */
1884
1885 static void
1886 invalidate (rtx x, machine_mode full_mode)
1887 {
1888 int i;
1889 struct table_elt *p;
1890 rtx addr;
1891
1892 switch (GET_CODE (x))
1893 {
1894 case REG:
1895 invalidate_reg (x);
1896 return;
1897
1898 case SUBREG:
1899 invalidate (SUBREG_REG (x), VOIDmode);
1900 return;
1901
1902 case PARALLEL:
1903 for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; --i)
1904 invalidate (XVECEXP (x, 0, i), VOIDmode);
1905 return;
1906
1907 case EXPR_LIST:
1908 /* This is part of a disjoint return value; extract the location in
1909 question ignoring the offset. */
1910 invalidate (XEXP (x, 0), VOIDmode);
1911 return;
1912
1913 case MEM:
1914 addr = canon_rtx (get_addr (XEXP (x, 0)));
1915 /* Calculate the canonical version of X here so that
1916 true_dependence doesn't generate new RTL for X on each call. */
1917 x = canon_rtx (x);
1918
1919 /* Remove all hash table elements that refer to overlapping pieces of
1920 memory. */
1921 if (full_mode == VOIDmode)
1922 full_mode = GET_MODE (x);
1923
1924 for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
1925 {
1926 struct table_elt *next;
1927
1928 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1929 {
1930 next = p->next_same_hash;
1931 if (p->in_memory)
1932 {
1933 /* Just canonicalize the expression once;
1934 otherwise each time we call invalidate
1935 true_dependence will canonicalize the
1936 expression again. */
1937 if (!p->canon_exp)
1938 p->canon_exp = canon_rtx (p->exp);
1939 if (check_dependence (p->canon_exp, x, full_mode, addr))
1940 remove_from_table (p, i);
1941 }
1942 }
1943 }
1944 return;
1945
1946 default:
1947 gcc_unreachable ();
1948 }
1949 }
1950
1951 /* Invalidate DEST. Used when DEST is not going to be added
1952 into the hash table for some reason, e.g. do_not_record
1953 flagged on it. */
1954
1955 static void
1956 invalidate_dest (rtx dest)
1957 {
1958 if (REG_P (dest)
1959 || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
1960 || MEM_P (dest))
1961 invalidate (dest, VOIDmode);
1962 else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
1963 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
1964 invalidate (XEXP (dest, 0), GET_MODE (dest));
1965 }
1966
1967 /* Remove all expressions that refer to register REGNO,
1969 since they are already invalid, and we are about to
1970 mark that register valid again and don't want the old
1971 expressions to reappear as valid. */
1972
1973 static void
1974 remove_invalid_refs (unsigned int regno)
1975 {
1976 unsigned int i;
1977 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1978
1979 for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
1980 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1981 {
1982 next = p->next_same_hash;
1983 if (!REG_P (p->exp) && refers_to_regno_p (regno, p->exp))
1984 remove_from_table (p, i);
1985 }
1986 }
1987
1988 /* Likewise for a subreg with subreg_reg REGNO, subreg_byte OFFSET,
1989 and mode MODE. */
1990 static void
1991 remove_invalid_subreg_refs (unsigned int regno, poly_uint64 offset,
1992 machine_mode mode)
1993 {
1994 unsigned int i;
1995 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1996
1997 for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
1998 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1999 {
2000 rtx exp = p->exp;
2001 next = p->next_same_hash;
2002
2003 if (!REG_P (exp)
2004 && (GET_CODE (exp) != SUBREG
2005 || !REG_P (SUBREG_REG (exp))
2006 || REGNO (SUBREG_REG (exp)) != regno
2007 || ranges_maybe_overlap_p (SUBREG_BYTE (exp),
2008 GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (exp)),
2009 offset, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)))
2010 && refers_to_regno_p (regno, p->exp))
2011 remove_from_table (p, i);
2012 }
2013 }
2014
2015 /* Recompute the hash codes of any valid entries in the hash table that
2017 reference X, if X is a register, or SUBREG_REG (X) if X is a SUBREG.
2018
2019 This is called when we make a jump equivalence. */
2020
2021 static void
2022 rehash_using_reg (rtx x)
2023 {
2024 unsigned int i;
2025 struct table_elt *p, *next;
2026 unsigned hash;
2027
2028 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
2029 x = SUBREG_REG (x);
2030
2031 /* If X is not a register or if the register is known not to be in any
2032 valid entries in the table, we have no work to do. */
2033
2034 if (!REG_P (x)
2035 || REG_IN_TABLE (REGNO (x)) < 0
2036 || REG_IN_TABLE (REGNO (x)) != REG_TICK (REGNO (x)))
2037 return;
2038
2039 /* Scan all hash chains looking for valid entries that mention X.
2040 If we find one and it is in the wrong hash chain, move it. */
2041
2042 for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
2043 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
2044 {
2045 next = p->next_same_hash;
2046 if (reg_mentioned_p (x, p->exp)
2047 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false)
2048 && i != (hash = SAFE_HASH (p->exp, p->mode)))
2049 {
2050 if (p->next_same_hash)
2051 p->next_same_hash->prev_same_hash = p->prev_same_hash;
2052
2053 if (p->prev_same_hash)
2054 p->prev_same_hash->next_same_hash = p->next_same_hash;
2055 else
2056 table[i] = p->next_same_hash;
2057
2058 p->next_same_hash = table[hash];
2059 p->prev_same_hash = 0;
2060 if (table[hash])
2061 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = p;
2062 table[hash] = p;
2063 }
2064 }
2065 }
2066
2067 /* Remove from the hash table any expression that is a call-clobbered
2069 register in INSN. Also update their TICK values. */
2070
2071 static void
2072 invalidate_for_call (rtx_insn *insn)
2073 {
2074 unsigned int regno;
2075 unsigned hash;
2076 struct table_elt *p, *next;
2077 int in_table = 0;
2078 hard_reg_set_iterator hrsi;
2079
2080 /* Go through all the hard registers. For each that might be clobbered
2081 in call insn INSN, remove the register from quantity chains and update
2082 reg_tick if defined. Also see if any of these registers is currently
2083 in the table.
2084
2085 ??? We could be more precise for partially-clobbered registers,
2086 and only invalidate values that actually occupy the clobbered part
2087 of the registers. It doesn't seem worth the effort though, since
2088 we shouldn't see this situation much before RA. Whatever choice
2089 we make here has to be consistent with the table walk below,
2090 so any change to this test will require a change there too. */
2091 HARD_REG_SET callee_clobbers
2092 = insn_callee_abi (insn).full_and_partial_reg_clobbers ();
2093 EXECUTE_IF_SET_IN_HARD_REG_SET (callee_clobbers, 0, regno, hrsi)
2094 {
2095 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
2096 if (REG_TICK (regno) >= 0)
2097 {
2098 REG_TICK (regno)++;
2099 SUBREG_TICKED (regno) = -1;
2100 }
2101 in_table |= (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno) != 0);
2102 }
2103
2104 /* In the case where we have no call-clobbered hard registers in the
2105 table, we are done. Otherwise, scan the table and remove any
2106 entry that overlaps a call-clobbered register. */
2107
2108 if (in_table)
2109 for (hash = 0; hash < HASH_SIZE; hash++)
2110 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
2111 {
2112 next = p->next_same_hash;
2113
2114 if (!REG_P (p->exp)
2115 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2116 continue;
2117
2118 /* This must use the same test as above rather than the
2119 more accurate clobbers_reg_p. */
2120 if (overlaps_hard_reg_set_p (callee_clobbers, GET_MODE (p->exp),
2121 REGNO (p->exp)))
2122 remove_from_table (p, hash);
2123 }
2124 }
2125
2126 /* Given an expression X of type CONST,
2128 and ELT which is its table entry (or 0 if it
2129 is not in the hash table),
2130 return an alternate expression for X as a register plus integer.
2131 If none can be found, return 0. */
2132
2133 static rtx
2134 use_related_value (rtx x, struct table_elt *elt)
2135 {
2136 struct table_elt *relt = 0;
2137 struct table_elt *p, *q;
2138 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
2139
2140 /* First, is there anything related known?
2141 If we have a table element, we can tell from that.
2142 Otherwise, must look it up. */
2143
2144 if (elt != 0 && elt->related_value != 0)
2145 relt = elt;
2146 else if (elt == 0 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
2147 {
2148 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
2149 if (subexp != 0)
2150 relt = lookup (subexp,
2151 SAFE_HASH (subexp, GET_MODE (subexp)),
2152 GET_MODE (subexp));
2153 }
2154
2155 if (relt == 0)
2156 return 0;
2157
2158 /* Search all related table entries for one that has an
2159 equivalent register. */
2160
2161 p = relt;
2162 while (1)
2163 {
2164 /* This loop is strange in that it is executed in two different cases.
2165 The first is when X is already in the table. Then it is searching
2166 the RELATED_VALUE list of X's class (RELT). The second case is when
2167 X is not in the table. Then RELT points to a class for the related
2168 value.
2169
2170 Ensure that, whatever case we are in, that we ignore classes that have
2171 the same value as X. */
2172
2173 if (rtx_equal_p (x, p->exp))
2174 q = 0;
2175 else
2176 for (q = p->first_same_value; q; q = q->next_same_value)
2177 if (REG_P (q->exp))
2178 break;
2179
2180 if (q)
2181 break;
2182
2183 p = p->related_value;
2184
2185 /* We went all the way around, so there is nothing to be found.
2186 Alternatively, perhaps RELT was in the table for some other reason
2187 and it has no related values recorded. */
2188 if (p == relt || p == 0)
2189 break;
2190 }
2191
2192 if (q == 0)
2193 return 0;
2194
2195 offset = (get_integer_term (x) - get_integer_term (p->exp));
2196 /* Note: OFFSET may be 0 if P->xexp and X are related by commutativity. */
2197 return plus_constant (q->mode, q->exp, offset);
2198 }
2199
2200
2202 /* Hash a string. Just add its bytes up. */
2203 static inline unsigned
2204 hash_rtx_string (const char *ps)
2205 {
2206 unsigned hash = 0;
2207 const unsigned char *p = (const unsigned char *) ps;
2208
2209 if (p)
2210 while (*p)
2211 hash += *p++;
2212
2213 return hash;
2214 }
2215
2216 /* Same as hash_rtx, but call CB on each rtx if it is not NULL.
2217 When the callback returns true, we continue with the new rtx. */
2218
2219 unsigned
2220 hash_rtx_cb (const_rtx x, machine_mode mode,
2221 int *do_not_record_p, int *hash_arg_in_memory_p,
2222 bool have_reg_qty, hash_rtx_callback_function cb)
2223 {
2224 int i, j;
2225 unsigned hash = 0;
2226 enum rtx_code code;
2227 const char *fmt;
2228 machine_mode newmode;
2229 rtx newx;
2230
2231 /* Used to turn recursion into iteration. We can't rely on GCC's
2232 tail-recursion elimination since we need to keep accumulating values
2233 in HASH. */
2234 repeat:
2235 if (x == 0)
2236 return hash;
2237
2238 /* Invoke the callback first. */
2239 if (cb != NULL
2240 && ((*cb) (x, mode, &newx, &newmode)))
2241 {
2242 hash += hash_rtx_cb (newx, newmode, do_not_record_p,
2243 hash_arg_in_memory_p, have_reg_qty, cb);
2244 return hash;
2245 }
2246
2247 code = GET_CODE (x);
2248 switch (code)
2249 {
2250 case REG:
2251 {
2252 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
2253
2254 if (do_not_record_p && !reload_completed)
2255 {
2256 /* On some machines, we can't record any non-fixed hard register,
2257 because extending its life will cause reload problems. We
2258 consider ap, fp, sp, gp to be fixed for this purpose.
2259
2260 We also consider CCmode registers to be fixed for this purpose;
2261 failure to do so leads to failure to simplify 0<100 type of
2262 conditionals.
2263
2264 On all machines, we can't record any global registers.
2265 Nor should we record any register that is in a small
2266 class, as defined by TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P. */
2267 bool record;
2268
2269 if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2270 record = true;
2271 else if (x == frame_pointer_rtx
2272 || x == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
2273 || x == arg_pointer_rtx
2274 || x == stack_pointer_rtx
2275 || x == pic_offset_table_rtx)
2276 record = true;
2277 else if (global_regs[regno])
2278 record = false;
2279 else if (fixed_regs[regno])
2280 record = true;
2281 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_CC)
2282 record = true;
2283 else if (targetm.small_register_classes_for_mode_p (GET_MODE (x)))
2284 record = false;
2285 else if (targetm.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (regno)))
2286 record = false;
2287 else
2288 record = true;
2289
2290 if (!record)
2291 {
2292 *do_not_record_p = 1;
2293 return 0;
2294 }
2295 }
2296
2297 hash += ((unsigned int) REG << 7);
2298 hash += (have_reg_qty ? (unsigned) REG_QTY (regno) : regno);
2299 return hash;
2300 }
2301
2302 /* We handle SUBREG of a REG specially because the underlying
2303 reg changes its hash value with every value change; we don't
2304 want to have to forget unrelated subregs when one subreg changes. */
2305 case SUBREG:
2306 {
2307 if (REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
2308 {
2309 hash += (((unsigned int) SUBREG << 7)
2310 + REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x))
2311 + (constant_lower_bound (SUBREG_BYTE (x))
2312 / UNITS_PER_WORD));
2313 return hash;
2314 }
2315 break;
2316 }
2317
2318 case CONST_INT:
2319 hash += (((unsigned int) CONST_INT << 7) + (unsigned int) mode
2320 + (unsigned int) INTVAL (x));
2321 return hash;
2322
2323 case CONST_WIDE_INT:
2324 for (i = 0; i < CONST_WIDE_INT_NUNITS (x); i++)
2325 hash += CONST_WIDE_INT_ELT (x, i);
2326 return hash;
2327
2328 case CONST_POLY_INT:
2329 {
2330 inchash::hash h;
2331 h.add_int (hash);
2332 for (unsigned int i = 0; i < NUM_POLY_INT_COEFFS; ++i)
2333 h.add_wide_int (CONST_POLY_INT_COEFFS (x)[i]);
2334 return h.end ();
2335 }
2336
2337 case CONST_DOUBLE:
2338 /* This is like the general case, except that it only counts
2339 the integers representing the constant. */
2340 hash += (unsigned int) code + (unsigned int) GET_MODE (x);
2341 if (TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT == 0 && GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode)
2342 hash += ((unsigned int) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x)
2343 + (unsigned int) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x));
2344 else
2345 hash += real_hash (CONST_DOUBLE_REAL_VALUE (x));
2346 return hash;
2347
2348 case CONST_FIXED:
2349 hash += (unsigned int) code + (unsigned int) GET_MODE (x);
2350 hash += fixed_hash (CONST_FIXED_VALUE (x));
2351 return hash;
2352
2353 case CONST_VECTOR:
2354 {
2355 int units;
2356 rtx elt;
2357
2358 units = const_vector_encoded_nelts (x);
2359
2360 for (i = 0; i < units; ++i)
2361 {
2362 elt = CONST_VECTOR_ENCODED_ELT (x, i);
2363 hash += hash_rtx_cb (elt, GET_MODE (elt),
2364 do_not_record_p, hash_arg_in_memory_p,
2365 have_reg_qty, cb);
2366 }
2367
2368 return hash;
2369 }
2370
2371 /* Assume there is only one rtx object for any given label. */
2372 case LABEL_REF:
2373 /* We don't hash on the address of the CODE_LABEL to avoid bootstrap
2374 differences and differences between each stage's debugging dumps. */
2375 hash += (((unsigned int) LABEL_REF << 7)
2376 + CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (label_ref_label (x)));
2377 return hash;
2378
2379 case SYMBOL_REF:
2380 {
2381 /* Don't hash on the symbol's address to avoid bootstrap differences.
2382 Different hash values may cause expressions to be recorded in
2383 different orders and thus different registers to be used in the
2384 final assembler. This also avoids differences in the dump files
2385 between various stages. */
2386 unsigned int h = 0;
2387 const unsigned char *p = (const unsigned char *) XSTR (x, 0);
2388
2389 while (*p)
2390 h += (h << 7) + *p++; /* ??? revisit */
2391
2392 hash += ((unsigned int) SYMBOL_REF << 7) + h;
2393 return hash;
2394 }
2395
2396 case MEM:
2397 /* We don't record if marked volatile or if BLKmode since we don't
2398 know the size of the move. */
2399 if (do_not_record_p && (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x) || GET_MODE (x) == BLKmode))
2400 {
2401 *do_not_record_p = 1;
2402 return 0;
2403 }
2404 if (hash_arg_in_memory_p && !MEM_READONLY_P (x))
2405 *hash_arg_in_memory_p = 1;
2406
2407 /* Now that we have already found this special case,
2408 might as well speed it up as much as possible. */
2409 hash += (unsigned) MEM;
2410 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2411 goto repeat;
2412
2413 case USE:
2414 /* A USE that mentions non-volatile memory needs special
2415 handling since the MEM may be BLKmode which normally
2416 prevents an entry from being made. Pure calls are
2417 marked by a USE which mentions BLKmode memory.
2418 See calls.cc:emit_call_1. */
2419 if (MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0))
2420 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
2421 {
2422 hash += (unsigned) USE;
2423 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2424
2425 if (hash_arg_in_memory_p && !MEM_READONLY_P (x))
2426 *hash_arg_in_memory_p = 1;
2427
2428 /* Now that we have already found this special case,
2429 might as well speed it up as much as possible. */
2430 hash += (unsigned) MEM;
2431 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2432 goto repeat;
2433 }
2434 break;
2435
2436 case PRE_DEC:
2437 case PRE_INC:
2438 case POST_DEC:
2439 case POST_INC:
2440 case PRE_MODIFY:
2441 case POST_MODIFY:
2442 case PC:
2443 case CALL:
2444 case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
2445 if (do_not_record_p) {
2446 *do_not_record_p = 1;
2447 return 0;
2448 }
2449 else
2450 return hash;
2451 break;
2452
2453 case ASM_OPERANDS:
2454 if (do_not_record_p && MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
2455 {
2456 *do_not_record_p = 1;
2457 return 0;
2458 }
2459 else
2460 {
2461 /* We don't want to take the filename and line into account. */
2462 hash += (unsigned) code + (unsigned) GET_MODE (x)
2463 + hash_rtx_string (ASM_OPERANDS_TEMPLATE (x))
2464 + hash_rtx_string (ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_CONSTRAINT (x))
2465 + (unsigned) ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_IDX (x);
2466
2467 if (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x))
2468 {
2469 for (i = 1; i < ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x); i++)
2470 {
2471 hash += (hash_rtx_cb (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i),
2472 GET_MODE (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i)),
2473 do_not_record_p, hash_arg_in_memory_p,
2474 have_reg_qty, cb)
2475 + hash_rtx_string
2476 (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (x, i)));
2477 }
2478
2479 hash += hash_rtx_string (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (x, 0));
2480 x = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, 0);
2481 mode = GET_MODE (x);
2482 goto repeat;
2483 }
2484
2485 return hash;
2486 }
2487 break;
2488
2489 default:
2490 break;
2491 }
2492
2493 i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1;
2494 hash += (unsigned) code + (unsigned) GET_MODE (x);
2495 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2496 for (; i >= 0; i--)
2497 {
2498 switch (fmt[i])
2499 {
2500 case 'e':
2501 /* If we are about to do the last recursive call
2502 needed at this level, change it into iteration.
2503 This function is called enough to be worth it. */
2504 if (i == 0)
2505 {
2506 x = XEXP (x, i);
2507 goto repeat;
2508 }
2509
2510 hash += hash_rtx_cb (XEXP (x, i), VOIDmode, do_not_record_p,
2511 hash_arg_in_memory_p,
2512 have_reg_qty, cb);
2513 break;
2514
2515 case 'E':
2516 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2517 hash += hash_rtx_cb (XVECEXP (x, i, j), VOIDmode, do_not_record_p,
2518 hash_arg_in_memory_p,
2519 have_reg_qty, cb);
2520 break;
2521
2522 case 's':
2523 hash += hash_rtx_string (XSTR (x, i));
2524 break;
2525
2526 case 'i':
2527 hash += (unsigned int) XINT (x, i);
2528 break;
2529
2530 case 'p':
2531 hash += constant_lower_bound (SUBREG_BYTE (x));
2532 break;
2533
2534 case '0': case 't':
2535 /* Unused. */
2536 break;
2537
2538 default:
2539 gcc_unreachable ();
2540 }
2541 }
2542
2543 return hash;
2544 }
2545
2546 /* Hash an rtx. We are careful to make sure the value is never negative.
2547 Equivalent registers hash identically.
2548 MODE is used in hashing for CONST_INTs only;
2549 otherwise the mode of X is used.
2550
2551 Store 1 in DO_NOT_RECORD_P if any subexpression is volatile.
2552
2553 If HASH_ARG_IN_MEMORY_P is not NULL, store 1 in it if X contains
2554 a MEM rtx which does not have the MEM_READONLY_P flag set.
2555
2556 Note that cse_insn knows that the hash code of a MEM expression
2557 is just (int) MEM plus the hash code of the address. */
2558
2559 unsigned
2560 hash_rtx (const_rtx x, machine_mode mode, int *do_not_record_p,
2561 int *hash_arg_in_memory_p, bool have_reg_qty)
2562 {
2563 return hash_rtx_cb (x, mode, do_not_record_p,
2564 hash_arg_in_memory_p, have_reg_qty, NULL);
2565 }
2566
2567 /* Hash an rtx X for cse via hash_rtx.
2568 Stores 1 in do_not_record if any subexpression is volatile.
2569 Stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory if X contains a mem rtx which
2570 does not have the MEM_READONLY_P flag set. */
2571
2572 static inline unsigned
2573 canon_hash (rtx x, machine_mode mode)
2574 {
2575 return hash_rtx (x, mode, &do_not_record, &hash_arg_in_memory, true);
2576 }
2577
2578 /* Like canon_hash but with no side effects, i.e. do_not_record
2579 and hash_arg_in_memory are not changed. */
2580
2581 static inline unsigned
2582 safe_hash (rtx x, machine_mode mode)
2583 {
2584 int dummy_do_not_record;
2585 return hash_rtx (x, mode, &dummy_do_not_record, NULL, true);
2586 }
2587
2588 /* Return 1 iff X and Y would canonicalize into the same thing,
2590 without actually constructing the canonicalization of either one.
2591 If VALIDATE is nonzero,
2592 we assume X is an expression being processed from the rtl
2593 and Y was found in the hash table. We check register refs
2594 in Y for being marked as valid.
2595
2596 If FOR_GCSE is true, we compare X and Y for equivalence for GCSE. */
2597
2598 int
2599 exp_equiv_p (const_rtx x, const_rtx y, int validate, bool for_gcse)
2600 {
2601 int i, j;
2602 enum rtx_code code;
2603 const char *fmt;
2604
2605 /* Note: it is incorrect to assume an expression is equivalent to itself
2606 if VALIDATE is nonzero. */
2607 if (x == y && !validate)
2608 return 1;
2609
2610 if (x == 0 || y == 0)
2611 return x == y;
2612
2613 code = GET_CODE (x);
2614 if (code != GET_CODE (y))
2615 return 0;
2616
2617 /* (MULT:SI x y) and (MULT:HI x y) are NOT equivalent. */
2618 if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
2619 return 0;
2620
2621 /* MEMs referring to different address space are not equivalent. */
2622 if (code == MEM && MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x) != MEM_ADDR_SPACE (y))
2623 return 0;
2624
2625 switch (code)
2626 {
2627 case PC:
2628 CASE_CONST_UNIQUE:
2629 return x == y;
2630
2631 case CONST_VECTOR:
2632 if (!same_vector_encodings_p (x, y))
2633 return false;
2634 break;
2635
2636 case LABEL_REF:
2637 return label_ref_label (x) == label_ref_label (y);
2638
2639 case SYMBOL_REF:
2640 return XSTR (x, 0) == XSTR (y, 0);
2641
2642 case REG:
2643 if (for_gcse)
2644 return REGNO (x) == REGNO (y);
2645 else
2646 {
2647 unsigned int regno = REGNO (y);
2648 unsigned int i;
2649 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (y);
2650
2651 /* If the quantities are not the same, the expressions are not
2652 equivalent. If there are and we are not to validate, they
2653 are equivalent. Otherwise, ensure all regs are up-to-date. */
2654
2655 if (REG_QTY (REGNO (x)) != REG_QTY (regno))
2656 return 0;
2657
2658 if (! validate)
2659 return 1;
2660
2661 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
2662 if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i))
2663 return 0;
2664
2665 return 1;
2666 }
2667
2668 case MEM:
2669 if (for_gcse)
2670 {
2671 /* A volatile mem should not be considered equivalent to any
2672 other. */
2673 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x) || MEM_VOLATILE_P (y))
2674 return 0;
2675
2676 /* Can't merge two expressions in different alias sets, since we
2677 can decide that the expression is transparent in a block when
2678 it isn't, due to it being set with the different alias set.
2679
2680 Also, can't merge two expressions with different MEM_ATTRS.
2681 They could e.g. be two different entities allocated into the
2682 same space on the stack (see e.g. PR25130). In that case, the
2683 MEM addresses can be the same, even though the two MEMs are
2684 absolutely not equivalent.
2685
2686 But because really all MEM attributes should be the same for
2687 equivalent MEMs, we just use the invariant that MEMs that have
2688 the same attributes share the same mem_attrs data structure. */
2689 if (!mem_attrs_eq_p (MEM_ATTRS (x), MEM_ATTRS (y)))
2690 return 0;
2691
2692 /* If we are handling exceptions, we cannot consider two expressions
2693 with different trapping status as equivalent, because simple_mem
2694 might accept one and reject the other. */
2695 if (cfun->can_throw_non_call_exceptions
2696 && (MEM_NOTRAP_P (x) != MEM_NOTRAP_P (y)))
2697 return 0;
2698 }
2699 break;
2700
2701 /* For commutative operations, check both orders. */
2702 case PLUS:
2703 case MULT:
2704 case AND:
2705 case IOR:
2706 case XOR:
2707 case NE:
2708 case EQ:
2709 return ((exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 0),
2710 validate, for_gcse)
2711 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 1),
2712 validate, for_gcse))
2713 || (exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 1),
2714 validate, for_gcse)
2715 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 0),
2716 validate, for_gcse)));
2717
2718 case ASM_OPERANDS:
2719 /* We don't use the generic code below because we want to
2720 disregard filename and line numbers. */
2721
2722 /* A volatile asm isn't equivalent to any other. */
2723 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x) || MEM_VOLATILE_P (y))
2724 return 0;
2725
2726 if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y)
2727 || strcmp (ASM_OPERANDS_TEMPLATE (x), ASM_OPERANDS_TEMPLATE (y))
2728 || strcmp (ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_CONSTRAINT (x),
2729 ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_CONSTRAINT (y))
2730 || ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_IDX (x) != ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_IDX (y)
2731 || ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) != ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (y))
2732 return 0;
2733
2734 if (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x))
2735 {
2736 for (i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2737 if (! exp_equiv_p (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i),
2738 ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (y, i),
2739 validate, for_gcse)
2740 || strcmp (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (x, i),
2741 ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (y, i)))
2742 return 0;
2743 }
2744
2745 return 1;
2746
2747 default:
2748 break;
2749 }
2750
2751 /* Compare the elements. If any pair of corresponding elements
2752 fail to match, return 0 for the whole thing. */
2753
2754 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2755 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2756 {
2757 switch (fmt[i])
2758 {
2759 case 'e':
2760 if (! exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, i), XEXP (y, i),
2761 validate, for_gcse))
2762 return 0;
2763 break;
2764
2765 case 'E':
2766 if (XVECLEN (x, i) != XVECLEN (y, i))
2767 return 0;
2768 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2769 if (! exp_equiv_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), XVECEXP (y, i, j),
2770 validate, for_gcse))
2771 return 0;
2772 break;
2773
2774 case 's':
2775 if (strcmp (XSTR (x, i), XSTR (y, i)))
2776 return 0;
2777 break;
2778
2779 case 'i':
2780 if (XINT (x, i) != XINT (y, i))
2781 return 0;
2782 break;
2783
2784 case 'w':
2785 if (XWINT (x, i) != XWINT (y, i))
2786 return 0;
2787 break;
2788
2789 case 'p':
2790 if (maybe_ne (SUBREG_BYTE (x), SUBREG_BYTE (y)))
2791 return 0;
2792 break;
2793
2794 case '0':
2795 case 't':
2796 break;
2797
2798 default:
2799 gcc_unreachable ();
2800 }
2801 }
2802
2803 return 1;
2804 }
2805
2806 /* Subroutine of canon_reg. Pass *XLOC through canon_reg, and validate
2808 the result if necessary. INSN is as for canon_reg. */
2809
2810 static void
2811 validate_canon_reg (rtx *xloc, rtx_insn *insn)
2812 {
2813 if (*xloc)
2814 {
2815 rtx new_rtx = canon_reg (*xloc, insn);
2816
2817 /* If replacing pseudo with hard reg or vice versa, ensure the
2818 insn remains valid. Likewise if the insn has MATCH_DUPs. */
2819 gcc_assert (insn && new_rtx);
2820 validate_change (insn, xloc, new_rtx, 1);
2821 }
2822 }
2823
2824 /* Canonicalize an expression:
2825 replace each register reference inside it
2826 with the "oldest" equivalent register.
2827
2828 If INSN is nonzero validate_change is used to ensure that INSN remains valid
2829 after we make our substitution. The calls are made with IN_GROUP nonzero
2830 so apply_change_group must be called upon the outermost return from this
2831 function (unless INSN is zero). The result of apply_change_group can
2832 generally be discarded since the changes we are making are optional. */
2833
2834 static rtx
2835 canon_reg (rtx x, rtx_insn *insn)
2836 {
2837 int i;
2838 enum rtx_code code;
2839 const char *fmt;
2840
2841 if (x == 0)
2842 return x;
2843
2844 code = GET_CODE (x);
2845 switch (code)
2846 {
2847 case PC:
2848 case CONST:
2849 CASE_CONST_ANY:
2850 case SYMBOL_REF:
2851 case LABEL_REF:
2852 case ADDR_VEC:
2853 case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
2854 return x;
2855
2856 case REG:
2857 {
2858 int first;
2859 int q;
2860 struct qty_table_elem *ent;
2861
2862 /* Never replace a hard reg, because hard regs can appear
2863 in more than one machine mode, and we must preserve the mode
2864 of each occurrence. Also, some hard regs appear in
2865 MEMs that are shared and mustn't be altered. Don't try to
2866 replace any reg that maps to a reg of class NO_REGS. */
2867 if (REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2868 || ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
2869 return x;
2870
2871 q = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
2872 ent = &qty_table[q];
2873 first = ent->first_reg;
2874 return (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
2875 : REGNO_REG_CLASS (first) == NO_REGS ? x
2876 : gen_rtx_REG (ent->mode, first));
2877 }
2878
2879 default:
2880 break;
2881 }
2882
2883 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2884 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2885 {
2886 int j;
2887
2888 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2889 validate_canon_reg (&XEXP (x, i), insn);
2890 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2891 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2892 validate_canon_reg (&XVECEXP (x, i, j), insn);
2893 }
2894
2895 return x;
2896 }
2897
2898 /* Given an operation (CODE, *PARG1, *PARG2), where code is a comparison
2900 operation (EQ, NE, GT, etc.), follow it back through the hash table and
2901 what values are being compared.
2902
2903 *PARG1 and *PARG2 are updated to contain the rtx representing the values
2904 actually being compared. For example, if *PARG1 was (reg:CC CC_REG) and
2905 *PARG2 was (const_int 0), *PARG1 and *PARG2 will be set to the objects that
2906 were compared to produce (reg:CC CC_REG).
2907
2908 The return value is the comparison operator and is either the code of
2909 A or the code corresponding to the inverse of the comparison. */
2910
2911 static enum rtx_code
2912 find_comparison_args (enum rtx_code code, rtx *parg1, rtx *parg2,
2913 machine_mode *pmode1, machine_mode *pmode2)
2914 {
2915 rtx arg1, arg2;
2916 hash_set<rtx> *visited = NULL;
2917 /* Set nonzero when we find something of interest. */
2918 rtx x = NULL;
2919
2920 arg1 = *parg1, arg2 = *parg2;
2921
2922 /* If ARG2 is const0_rtx, see what ARG1 is equivalent to. */
2923
2924 while (arg2 == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (arg1)))
2925 {
2926 int reverse_code = 0;
2927 struct table_elt *p = 0;
2928
2929 /* Remember state from previous iteration. */
2930 if (x)
2931 {
2932 if (!visited)
2933 visited = new hash_set<rtx>;
2934 visited->add (x);
2935 x = 0;
2936 }
2937
2938 /* If arg1 is a COMPARE, extract the comparison arguments from it. */
2939
2940 if (GET_CODE (arg1) == COMPARE && arg2 == const0_rtx)
2941 x = arg1;
2942
2943 /* If ARG1 is a comparison operator and CODE is testing for
2944 STORE_FLAG_VALUE, get the inner arguments. */
2945
2946 else if (COMPARISON_P (arg1))
2947 {
2948 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2949 REAL_VALUE_TYPE fsfv;
2950 #endif
2951
2952 if (code == NE
2953 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2954 && code == LT && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2955 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2956 || (SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (arg1))
2957 && (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
2958 REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
2959 #endif
2960 )
2961 x = arg1;
2962 else if (code == EQ
2963 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2964 && code == GE && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2965 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2966 || (SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (arg1))
2967 && (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
2968 REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
2969 #endif
2970 )
2971 x = arg1, reverse_code = 1;
2972 }
2973
2974 /* ??? We could also check for
2975
2976 (ne (and (eq (...) (const_int 1))) (const_int 0))
2977
2978 and related forms, but let's wait until we see them occurring. */
2979
2980 if (x == 0)
2981 /* Look up ARG1 in the hash table and see if it has an equivalence
2982 that lets us see what is being compared. */
2983 p = lookup (arg1, SAFE_HASH (arg1, GET_MODE (arg1)), GET_MODE (arg1));
2984 if (p)
2985 {
2986 p = p->first_same_value;
2987
2988 /* If what we compare is already known to be constant, that is as
2989 good as it gets.
2990 We need to break the loop in this case, because otherwise we
2991 can have an infinite loop when looking at a reg that is known
2992 to be a constant which is the same as a comparison of a reg
2993 against zero which appears later in the insn stream, which in
2994 turn is constant and the same as the comparison of the first reg
2995 against zero... */
2996 if (p->is_const)
2997 break;
2998 }
2999
3000 for (; p; p = p->next_same_value)
3001 {
3002 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (p->exp);
3003 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
3004 REAL_VALUE_TYPE fsfv;
3005 #endif
3006
3007 /* If the entry isn't valid, skip it. */
3008 if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
3009 continue;
3010
3011 /* If it's a comparison we've used before, skip it. */
3012 if (visited && visited->contains (p->exp))
3013 continue;
3014
3015 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == COMPARE
3016 /* Another possibility is that this machine has a compare insn
3017 that includes the comparison code. In that case, ARG1 would
3018 be equivalent to a comparison operation that would set ARG1 to
3019 either STORE_FLAG_VALUE or zero. If this is an NE operation,
3020 ORIG_CODE is the actual comparison being done; if it is an EQ,
3021 we must reverse ORIG_CODE. On machine with a negative value
3022 for STORE_FLAG_VALUE, also look at LT and GE operations. */
3023 || ((code == NE
3024 || (code == LT
3025 && val_signbit_known_set_p (inner_mode,
3026 STORE_FLAG_VALUE))
3027 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
3028 || (code == LT
3029 && SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (inner_mode)
3030 && (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
3031 REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
3032 #endif
3033 )
3034 && COMPARISON_P (p->exp)))
3035 {
3036 x = p->exp;
3037 break;
3038 }
3039 else if ((code == EQ
3040 || (code == GE
3041 && val_signbit_known_set_p (inner_mode,
3042 STORE_FLAG_VALUE))
3043 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
3044 || (code == GE
3045 && SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (inner_mode)
3046 && (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
3047 REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
3048 #endif
3049 )
3050 && COMPARISON_P (p->exp))
3051 {
3052 reverse_code = 1;
3053 x = p->exp;
3054 break;
3055 }
3056
3057 /* If this non-trapping address, e.g. fp + constant, the
3058 equivalent is a better operand since it may let us predict
3059 the value of the comparison. */
3060 else if (!rtx_addr_can_trap_p (p->exp))
3061 {
3062 arg1 = p->exp;
3063 continue;
3064 }
3065 }
3066
3067 /* If we didn't find a useful equivalence for ARG1, we are done.
3068 Otherwise, set up for the next iteration. */
3069 if (x == 0)
3070 break;
3071
3072 /* If we need to reverse the comparison, make sure that is
3073 possible -- we can't necessarily infer the value of GE from LT
3074 with floating-point operands. */
3075 if (reverse_code)
3076 {
3077 enum rtx_code reversed = reversed_comparison_code (x, NULL);
3078 if (reversed == UNKNOWN)
3079 break;
3080 else
3081 code = reversed;
3082 }
3083 else if (COMPARISON_P (x))
3084 code = GET_CODE (x);
3085 arg1 = XEXP (x, 0), arg2 = XEXP (x, 1);
3086 }
3087
3088 /* Return our results. Return the modes from before fold_rtx
3089 because fold_rtx might produce const_int, and then it's too late. */
3090 *pmode1 = GET_MODE (arg1), *pmode2 = GET_MODE (arg2);
3091 *parg1 = fold_rtx (arg1, 0), *parg2 = fold_rtx (arg2, 0);
3092
3093 if (visited)
3094 delete visited;
3095 return code;
3096 }
3097
3098 /* If X is a nontrivial arithmetic operation on an argument for which
3100 a constant value can be determined, return the result of operating
3101 on that value, as a constant. Otherwise, return X, possibly with
3102 one or more operands changed to a forward-propagated constant.
3103
3104 If X is a register whose contents are known, we do NOT return
3105 those contents here; equiv_constant is called to perform that task.
3106 For SUBREGs and MEMs, we do that both here and in equiv_constant.
3107
3108 INSN is the insn that we may be modifying. If it is 0, make a copy
3109 of X before modifying it. */
3110
3111 static rtx
3112 fold_rtx (rtx x, rtx_insn *insn)
3113 {
3114 enum rtx_code code;
3115 machine_mode mode;
3116 const char *fmt;
3117 int i;
3118 rtx new_rtx = 0;
3119 int changed = 0;
3120 poly_int64 xval;
3121
3122 /* Operands of X. */
3123 /* Workaround -Wmaybe-uninitialized false positive during
3124 profiledbootstrap by initializing them. */
3125 rtx folded_arg0 = NULL_RTX;
3126 rtx folded_arg1 = NULL_RTX;
3127
3128 /* Constant equivalents of first three operands of X;
3129 0 when no such equivalent is known. */
3130 rtx const_arg0;
3131 rtx const_arg1;
3132 rtx const_arg2;
3133
3134 /* The mode of the first operand of X. We need this for sign and zero
3135 extends. */
3136 machine_mode mode_arg0;
3137
3138 if (x == 0)
3139 return x;
3140
3141 /* Try to perform some initial simplifications on X. */
3142 code = GET_CODE (x);
3143 switch (code)
3144 {
3145 case MEM:
3146 case SUBREG:
3147 /* The first operand of a SIGN/ZERO_EXTRACT has a different meaning
3148 than it would in other contexts. Basically its mode does not
3149 signify the size of the object read. That information is carried
3150 by size operand. If we happen to have a MEM of the appropriate
3151 mode in our tables with a constant value we could simplify the
3152 extraction incorrectly if we allowed substitution of that value
3153 for the MEM. */
3154 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
3155 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
3156 if ((new_rtx = equiv_constant (x)) != NULL_RTX)
3157 return new_rtx;
3158 return x;
3159
3160 case CONST:
3161 CASE_CONST_ANY:
3162 case SYMBOL_REF:
3163 case LABEL_REF:
3164 case REG:
3165 case PC:
3166 /* No use simplifying an EXPR_LIST
3167 since they are used only for lists of args
3168 in a function call's REG_EQUAL note. */
3169 case EXPR_LIST:
3170 return x;
3171
3172 case ASM_OPERANDS:
3173 if (insn)
3174 {
3175 for (i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
3176 validate_change (insn, &ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i),
3177 fold_rtx (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i), insn), 0);
3178 }
3179 return x;
3180
3181 case CALL:
3182 if (NO_FUNCTION_CSE && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))
3183 return x;
3184 break;
3185 case VEC_SELECT:
3186 {
3187 rtx trueop0 = XEXP (x, 0);
3188 mode = GET_MODE (trueop0);
3189 rtx trueop1 = XEXP (x, 1);
3190 /* If we select a low-part subreg, return that. */
3191 if (vec_series_lowpart_p (GET_MODE (x), mode, trueop1))
3192 {
3193 rtx new_rtx = lowpart_subreg (GET_MODE (x), trueop0, mode);
3194 if (new_rtx != NULL_RTX)
3195 return new_rtx;
3196 }
3197 }
3198
3199 /* Anything else goes through the loop below. */
3200 default:
3201 break;
3202 }
3203
3204 mode = GET_MODE (x);
3205 const_arg0 = 0;
3206 const_arg1 = 0;
3207 const_arg2 = 0;
3208 mode_arg0 = VOIDmode;
3209
3210 /* Try folding our operands.
3211 Then see which ones have constant values known. */
3212
3213 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
3214 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
3215 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
3216 {
3217 rtx folded_arg = XEXP (x, i), const_arg;
3218 machine_mode mode_arg = GET_MODE (folded_arg);
3219
3220 switch (GET_CODE (folded_arg))
3221 {
3222 case MEM:
3223 case REG:
3224 case SUBREG:
3225 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
3226 break;
3227
3228 case CONST:
3229 CASE_CONST_ANY:
3230 case SYMBOL_REF:
3231 case LABEL_REF:
3232 const_arg = folded_arg;
3233 break;
3234
3235 default:
3236 folded_arg = fold_rtx (folded_arg, insn);
3237 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
3238 break;
3239 }
3240
3241 /* For the first three operands, see if the operand
3242 is constant or equivalent to a constant. */
3243 switch (i)
3244 {
3245 case 0:
3246 folded_arg0 = folded_arg;
3247 const_arg0 = const_arg;
3248 mode_arg0 = mode_arg;
3249 break;
3250 case 1:
3251 folded_arg1 = folded_arg;
3252 const_arg1 = const_arg;
3253 break;
3254 case 2:
3255 const_arg2 = const_arg;
3256 break;
3257 }
3258
3259 /* Pick the least expensive of the argument and an equivalent constant
3260 argument. */
3261 if (const_arg != 0
3262 && const_arg != folded_arg
3263 && (COST_IN (const_arg, mode_arg, code, i)
3264 <= COST_IN (folded_arg, mode_arg, code, i))
3265
3266 /* It's not safe to substitute the operand of a conversion
3267 operator with a constant, as the conversion's identity
3268 depends upon the mode of its operand. This optimization
3269 is handled by the call to simplify_unary_operation. */
3270 && (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != RTX_UNARY
3271 || GET_MODE (const_arg) == mode_arg0
3272 || (code != ZERO_EXTEND
3273 && code != SIGN_EXTEND
3274 && code != TRUNCATE
3275 && code != FLOAT_TRUNCATE
3276 && code != FLOAT_EXTEND
3277 && code != FLOAT
3278 && code != FIX
3279 && code != UNSIGNED_FLOAT
3280 && code != UNSIGNED_FIX)))
3281 folded_arg = const_arg;
3282
3283 if (folded_arg == XEXP (x, i))
3284 continue;
3285
3286 if (insn == NULL_RTX && !changed)
3287 x = copy_rtx (x);
3288 changed = 1;
3289 validate_unshare_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), folded_arg, 1);
3290 }
3291
3292 if (changed)
3293 {
3294 /* Canonicalize X if necessary, and keep const_argN and folded_argN
3295 consistent with the order in X. */
3296 if (canonicalize_change_group (insn, x))
3297 {
3298 std::swap (const_arg0, const_arg1);
3299 std::swap (folded_arg0, folded_arg1);
3300 }
3301
3302 apply_change_group ();
3303 }
3304
3305 /* If X is an arithmetic operation, see if we can simplify it. */
3306
3307 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
3308 {
3309 case RTX_UNARY:
3310 {
3311 /* We can't simplify extension ops unless we know the
3312 original mode. */
3313 if ((code == ZERO_EXTEND || code == SIGN_EXTEND)
3314 && mode_arg0 == VOIDmode)
3315 break;
3316
3317 new_rtx = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode,
3318 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
3319 mode_arg0);
3320 }
3321 break;
3322
3323 case RTX_COMPARE:
3324 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE:
3325 /* See what items are actually being compared and set FOLDED_ARG[01]
3326 to those values and CODE to the actual comparison code. If any are
3327 constant, set CONST_ARG0 and CONST_ARG1 appropriately. We needn't
3328 do anything if both operands are already known to be constant. */
3329
3330 /* ??? Vector mode comparisons are not supported yet. */
3331 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (mode))
3332 break;
3333
3334 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
3335 {
3336 struct table_elt *p0, *p1;
3337 rtx true_rtx, false_rtx;
3338 machine_mode mode_arg1;
3339
3340 if (SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
3341 {
3342 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
3343 true_rtx = (const_double_from_real_value
3344 (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (mode), mode));
3345 #else
3346 true_rtx = NULL_RTX;
3347 #endif
3348 false_rtx = CONST0_RTX (mode);
3349 }
3350 else
3351 {
3352 true_rtx = const_true_rtx;
3353 false_rtx = const0_rtx;
3354 }
3355
3356 code = find_comparison_args (code, &folded_arg0, &folded_arg1,
3357 &mode_arg0, &mode_arg1);
3358
3359 /* If the mode is VOIDmode or a MODE_CC mode, we don't know
3360 what kinds of things are being compared, so we can't do
3361 anything with this comparison. */
3362
3363 if (mode_arg0 == VOIDmode || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_CC)
3364 break;
3365
3366 const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
3367 const_arg1 = equiv_constant (folded_arg1);
3368
3369 /* If we do not now have two constants being compared, see
3370 if we can nevertheless deduce some things about the
3371 comparison. */
3372 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
3373 {
3374 if (const_arg1 != NULL)
3375 {
3376 rtx cheapest_simplification;
3377 int cheapest_cost;
3378 rtx simp_result;
3379 struct table_elt *p;
3380
3381 /* See if we can find an equivalent of folded_arg0
3382 that gets us a cheaper expression, possibly a
3383 constant through simplifications. */
3384 p = lookup (folded_arg0, SAFE_HASH (folded_arg0, mode_arg0),
3385 mode_arg0);
3386
3387 if (p != NULL)
3388 {
3389 cheapest_simplification = x;
3390 cheapest_cost = COST (x, mode);
3391
3392 for (p = p->first_same_value; p != NULL; p = p->next_same_value)
3393 {
3394 int cost;
3395
3396 /* If the entry isn't valid, skip it. */
3397 if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
3398 continue;
3399
3400 /* Try to simplify using this equivalence. */
3401 simp_result
3402 = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode,
3403 mode_arg0,
3404 p->exp,
3405 const_arg1);
3406
3407 if (simp_result == NULL)
3408 continue;
3409
3410 cost = COST (simp_result, mode);
3411 if (cost < cheapest_cost)
3412 {
3413 cheapest_cost = cost;
3414 cheapest_simplification = simp_result;
3415 }
3416 }
3417
3418 /* If we have a cheaper expression now, use that
3419 and try folding it further, from the top. */
3420 if (cheapest_simplification != x)
3421 return fold_rtx (copy_rtx (cheapest_simplification),
3422 insn);
3423 }
3424 }
3425
3426 /* See if the two operands are the same. */
3427
3428 if ((REG_P (folded_arg0)
3429 && REG_P (folded_arg1)
3430 && (REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg0))
3431 == REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg1))))
3432 || ((p0 = lookup (folded_arg0,
3433 SAFE_HASH (folded_arg0, mode_arg0),
3434 mode_arg0))
3435 && (p1 = lookup (folded_arg1,
3436 SAFE_HASH (folded_arg1, mode_arg0),
3437 mode_arg0))
3438 && p0->first_same_value == p1->first_same_value))
3439 folded_arg1 = folded_arg0;
3440
3441 /* If FOLDED_ARG0 is a register, see if the comparison we are
3442 doing now is either the same as we did before or the reverse
3443 (we only check the reverse if not floating-point). */
3444 else if (REG_P (folded_arg0))
3445 {
3446 int qty = REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg0));
3447
3448 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (folded_arg0)))
3449 {
3450 struct qty_table_elem *ent = &qty_table[qty];
3451
3452 if ((comparison_dominates_p (ent->comparison_code, code)
3453 || (! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode_arg0)
3454 && comparison_dominates_p (ent->comparison_code,
3455 reverse_condition (code))))
3456 && (rtx_equal_p (ent->comparison_const, folded_arg1)
3457 || (const_arg1
3458 && rtx_equal_p (ent->comparison_const,
3459 const_arg1))
3460 || (REG_P (folded_arg1)
3461 && (REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg1)) == ent->comparison_qty))))
3462 {
3463 if (comparison_dominates_p (ent->comparison_code, code))
3464 {
3465 if (true_rtx)
3466 return true_rtx;
3467 else
3468 break;
3469 }
3470 else
3471 return false_rtx;
3472 }
3473 }
3474 }
3475 }
3476 }
3477
3478 /* If we are comparing against zero, see if the first operand is
3479 equivalent to an IOR with a constant. If so, we may be able to
3480 determine the result of this comparison. */
3481 if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx && !const_arg0)
3482 {
3483 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, IOR);
3484 rtx inner_const;
3485
3486 if (y != 0
3487 && (inner_const = equiv_constant (XEXP (y, 1))) != 0
3488 && CONST_INT_P (inner_const)
3489 && INTVAL (inner_const) != 0)
3490 folded_arg0 = gen_rtx_IOR (mode_arg0, XEXP (y, 0), inner_const);
3491 }
3492
3493 {
3494 rtx op0 = const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : copy_rtx (folded_arg0);
3495 rtx op1 = const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : copy_rtx (folded_arg1);
3496 new_rtx = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
3497 op0, op1);
3498 }
3499 break;
3500
3501 case RTX_BIN_ARITH:
3502 case RTX_COMM_ARITH:
3503 switch (code)
3504 {
3505 case PLUS:
3506 /* If the second operand is a LABEL_REF, see if the first is a MINUS
3507 with that LABEL_REF as its second operand. If so, the result is
3508 the first operand of that MINUS. This handles switches with an
3509 ADDR_DIFF_VEC table. */
3510 if (const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == LABEL_REF)
3511 {
3512 rtx y
3513 = GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == MINUS ? folded_arg0
3514 : lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, MINUS);
3515
3516 if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
3517 && label_ref_label (XEXP (y, 1)) == label_ref_label (const_arg1))
3518 return XEXP (y, 0);
3519
3520 /* Now try for a CONST of a MINUS like the above. */
3521 if ((y = (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == CONST ? folded_arg0
3522 : lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, CONST))) != 0
3523 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MINUS
3524 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF
3525 && label_ref_label (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1)) == label_ref_label (const_arg1))
3526 return XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 0);
3527 }
3528
3529 /* Likewise if the operands are in the other order. */
3530 if (const_arg0 && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == LABEL_REF)
3531 {
3532 rtx y
3533 = GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == MINUS ? folded_arg1
3534 : lookup_as_function (folded_arg1, MINUS);
3535
3536 if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
3537 && label_ref_label (XEXP (y, 1)) == label_ref_label (const_arg0))
3538 return XEXP (y, 0);
3539
3540 /* Now try for a CONST of a MINUS like the above. */
3541 if ((y = (GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == CONST ? folded_arg1
3542 : lookup_as_function (folded_arg1, CONST))) != 0
3543 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MINUS
3544 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF
3545 && label_ref_label (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1)) == label_ref_label (const_arg0))
3546 return XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 0);
3547 }
3548
3549 /* If second operand is a register equivalent to a negative
3550 CONST_INT, see if we can find a register equivalent to the
3551 positive constant. Make a MINUS if so. Don't do this for
3552 a non-negative constant since we might then alternate between
3553 choosing positive and negative constants. Having the positive
3554 constant previously-used is the more common case. Be sure
3555 the resulting constant is non-negative; if const_arg1 were
3556 the smallest negative number this would overflow: depending
3557 on the mode, this would either just be the same value (and
3558 hence not save anything) or be incorrect. */
3559 if (const_arg1 != 0 && CONST_INT_P (const_arg1)
3560 && INTVAL (const_arg1) < 0
3561 /* This used to test
3562
3563 -INTVAL (const_arg1) >= 0
3564
3565 But The Sun V5.0 compilers mis-compiled that test. So
3566 instead we test for the problematic value in a more direct
3567 manner and hope the Sun compilers get it correct. */
3568 && INTVAL (const_arg1) !=
3569 (HOST_WIDE_INT_1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT - 1))
3570 && REG_P (folded_arg1))
3571 {
3572 rtx new_const = GEN_INT (-INTVAL (const_arg1));
3573 struct table_elt *p
3574 = lookup (new_const, SAFE_HASH (new_const, mode), mode);
3575
3576 if (p)
3577 for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
3578 if (REG_P (p->exp))
3579 return simplify_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, folded_arg0,
3580 canon_reg (p->exp, NULL));
3581 }
3582 goto from_plus;
3583
3584 case MINUS:
3585 /* If we have (MINUS Y C), see if Y is known to be (PLUS Z C2).
3586 If so, produce (PLUS Z C2-C). */
3587 if (const_arg1 != 0 && poly_int_rtx_p (const_arg1, &xval))
3588 {
3589 rtx y = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), PLUS);
3590 if (y && poly_int_rtx_p (XEXP (y, 1)))
3591 return fold_rtx (plus_constant (mode, copy_rtx (y), -xval),
3592 NULL);
3593 }
3594
3595 /* Fall through. */
3596
3597 from_plus:
3598 case SMIN: case SMAX: case UMIN: case UMAX:
3599 case IOR: case AND: case XOR:
3600 case MULT:
3601 case ASHIFT: case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
3602 /* If we have (<op> <reg> <const_int>) for an associative OP and REG
3603 is known to be of similar form, we may be able to replace the
3604 operation with a combined operation. This may eliminate the
3605 intermediate operation if every use is simplified in this way.
3606 Note that the similar optimization done by combine.cc only works
3607 if the intermediate operation's result has only one reference. */
3608
3609 if (REG_P (folded_arg0)
3610 && const_arg1 && CONST_INT_P (const_arg1))
3611 {
3612 int is_shift
3613 = (code == ASHIFT || code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT);
3614 rtx y, inner_const, new_const;
3615 rtx canon_const_arg1 = const_arg1;
3616 enum rtx_code associate_code;
3617
3618 if (is_shift
3619 && (INTVAL (const_arg1) >= GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (mode)
3620 || INTVAL (const_arg1) < 0))
3621 {
3622 if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
3623 canon_const_arg1 = gen_int_shift_amount
3624 (mode, (INTVAL (const_arg1)
3625 & (GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (mode) - 1)));
3626 else
3627 break;
3628 }
3629
3630 y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, code);
3631 if (y == 0)
3632 break;
3633
3634 /* If we have compiled a statement like
3635 "if (x == (x & mask1))", and now are looking at
3636 "x & mask2", we will have a case where the first operand
3637 of Y is the same as our first operand. Unless we detect
3638 this case, an infinite loop will result. */
3639 if (XEXP (y, 0) == folded_arg0)
3640 break;
3641
3642 inner_const = equiv_constant (fold_rtx (XEXP (y, 1), 0));
3643 if (!inner_const || !CONST_INT_P (inner_const))
3644 break;
3645
3646 /* Don't associate these operations if they are a PLUS with the
3647 same constant and it is a power of two. These might be doable
3648 with a pre- or post-increment. Similarly for two subtracts of
3649 identical powers of two with post decrement. */
3650
3651 if (code == PLUS && const_arg1 == inner_const
3652 && ((HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
3653 && pow2p_hwi (INTVAL (const_arg1)))
3654 || (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
3655 && pow2p_hwi (INTVAL (const_arg1)))
3656 || (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
3657 && pow2p_hwi (- INTVAL (const_arg1)))
3658 || (HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
3659 && pow2p_hwi (- INTVAL (const_arg1)))))
3660 break;
3661
3662 /* ??? Vector mode shifts by scalar
3663 shift operand are not supported yet. */
3664 if (is_shift && VECTOR_MODE_P (mode))
3665 break;
3666
3667 if (is_shift
3668 && (INTVAL (inner_const) >= GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (mode)
3669 || INTVAL (inner_const) < 0))
3670 {
3671 if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
3672 inner_const = gen_int_shift_amount
3673 (mode, (INTVAL (inner_const)
3674 & (GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (mode) - 1)));
3675 else
3676 break;
3677 }
3678
3679 /* Compute the code used to compose the constants. For example,
3680 A-C1-C2 is A-(C1 + C2), so if CODE == MINUS, we want PLUS. */
3681
3682 associate_code = (is_shift || code == MINUS ? PLUS : code);
3683
3684 new_const = simplify_binary_operation (associate_code, mode,
3685 canon_const_arg1,
3686 inner_const);
3687
3688 if (new_const == 0)
3689 break;
3690
3691 /* If we are associating shift operations, don't let this
3692 produce a shift of the size of the object or larger.
3693 This could occur when we follow a sign-extend by a right
3694 shift on a machine that does a sign-extend as a pair
3695 of shifts. */
3696
3697 if (is_shift
3698 && CONST_INT_P (new_const)
3699 && INTVAL (new_const) >= GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (mode))
3700 {
3701 /* As an exception, we can turn an ASHIFTRT of this
3702 form into a shift of the number of bits - 1. */
3703 if (code == ASHIFTRT)
3704 new_const = gen_int_shift_amount
3705 (mode, GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (mode) - 1);
3706 else if (!side_effects_p (XEXP (y, 0)))
3707 return CONST0_RTX (mode);
3708 else
3709 break;
3710 }
3711
3712 y = copy_rtx (XEXP (y, 0));
3713
3714 /* If Y contains our first operand (the most common way this
3715 can happen is if Y is a MEM), we would do into an infinite
3716 loop if we tried to fold it. So don't in that case. */
3717
3718 if (! reg_mentioned_p (folded_arg0, y))
3719 y = fold_rtx (y, insn);
3720
3721 return simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, y, new_const);
3722 }
3723 break;
3724
3725 case DIV: case UDIV:
3726 /* ??? The associative optimization performed immediately above is
3727 also possible for DIV and UDIV using associate_code of MULT.
3728 However, we would need extra code to verify that the
3729 multiplication does not overflow, that is, there is no overflow
3730 in the calculation of new_const. */
3731 break;
3732
3733 default:
3734 break;
3735 }
3736
3737 new_rtx = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
3738 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
3739 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
3740 break;
3741
3742 case RTX_OBJ:
3743 /* (lo_sum (high X) X) is simply X. */
3744 if (code == LO_SUM && const_arg0 != 0
3745 && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == HIGH
3746 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (const_arg0, 0), const_arg1))
3747 return const_arg1;
3748 break;
3749
3750 case RTX_TERNARY:
3751 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS:
3752 new_rtx = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
3753 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
3754 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1,
3755 const_arg2 ? const_arg2 : XEXP (x, 2));
3756 break;
3757
3758 default:
3759 break;
3760 }
3761
3762 return new_rtx ? new_rtx : x;
3763 }
3764
3765 /* Return a constant value currently equivalent to X.
3767 Return 0 if we don't know one. */
3768
3769 static rtx
3770 equiv_constant (rtx x)
3771 {
3772 if (REG_P (x)
3773 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
3774 {
3775 int x_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
3776 struct qty_table_elem *x_ent = &qty_table[x_q];
3777
3778 if (x_ent->const_rtx)
3779 x = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), x_ent->const_rtx);
3780 }
3781
3782 if (x == 0 || CONSTANT_P (x))
3783 return x;
3784
3785 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
3786 {
3787 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
3788 machine_mode imode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
3789 rtx new_rtx;
3790
3791 /* See if we previously assigned a constant value to this SUBREG. */
3792 if ((new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_INT)) != 0
3793 || (new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_WIDE_INT)) != 0
3794 || (NUM_POLY_INT_COEFFS > 1
3795 && (new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_POLY_INT)) != 0)
3796 || (new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_DOUBLE)) != 0
3797 || (new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_FIXED)) != 0)
3798 return new_rtx;
3799
3800 /* If we didn't and if doing so makes sense, see if we previously
3801 assigned a constant value to the enclosing word mode SUBREG. */
3802 if (known_lt (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), UNITS_PER_WORD)
3803 && known_lt (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (imode)))
3804 {
3805 poly_int64 byte = (SUBREG_BYTE (x)
3806 - subreg_lowpart_offset (mode, word_mode));
3807 if (known_ge (byte, 0) && multiple_p (byte, UNITS_PER_WORD))
3808 {
3809 rtx y = gen_rtx_SUBREG (word_mode, SUBREG_REG (x), byte);
3810 new_rtx = lookup_as_function (y, CONST_INT);
3811 if (new_rtx)
3812 return gen_lowpart (mode, new_rtx);
3813 }
3814 }
3815
3816 /* Otherwise see if we already have a constant for the inner REG,
3817 and if that is enough to calculate an equivalent constant for
3818 the subreg. Note that the upper bits of paradoxical subregs
3819 are undefined, so they cannot be said to equal anything. */
3820 if (REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
3821 && !paradoxical_subreg_p (x)
3822 && (new_rtx = equiv_constant (SUBREG_REG (x))) != 0)
3823 return simplify_subreg (mode, new_rtx, imode, SUBREG_BYTE (x));
3824
3825 return 0;
3826 }
3827
3828 /* If X is a MEM, see if it is a constant-pool reference, or look it up in
3829 the hash table in case its value was seen before. */
3830
3831 if (MEM_P (x))
3832 {
3833 struct table_elt *elt;
3834
3835 x = avoid_constant_pool_reference (x);
3836 if (CONSTANT_P (x))
3837 return x;
3838
3839 elt = lookup (x, SAFE_HASH (x, GET_MODE (x)), GET_MODE (x));
3840 if (elt == 0)
3841 return 0;
3842
3843 for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
3844 if (elt->is_const && CONSTANT_P (elt->exp))
3845 return elt->exp;
3846 }
3847
3848 return 0;
3849 }
3850
3851 /* Given INSN, a jump insn, TAKEN indicates if we are following the
3853 "taken" branch.
3854
3855 In certain cases, this can cause us to add an equivalence. For example,
3856 if we are following the taken case of
3857 if (i == 2)
3858 we can add the fact that `i' and '2' are now equivalent.
3859
3860 In any case, we can record that this comparison was passed. If the same
3861 comparison is seen later, we will know its value. */
3862
3863 static void
3864 record_jump_equiv (rtx_insn *insn, bool taken)
3865 {
3866 int cond_known_true;
3867 rtx op0, op1;
3868 rtx set;
3869 machine_mode mode, mode0, mode1;
3870 int reversed_nonequality = 0;
3871 enum rtx_code code;
3872
3873 /* Ensure this is the right kind of insn. */
3874 gcc_assert (any_condjump_p (insn));
3875
3876 set = pc_set (insn);
3877
3878 /* See if this jump condition is known true or false. */
3879 if (taken)
3880 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 2) == pc_rtx);
3881 else
3882 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 1) == pc_rtx);
3883
3884 /* Get the type of comparison being done and the operands being compared.
3885 If we had to reverse a non-equality condition, record that fact so we
3886 know that it isn't valid for floating-point. */
3887 code = GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0));
3888 op0 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0), 0), insn);
3889 op1 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0), 1), insn);
3890
3891 /* If fold_rtx returns NULL_RTX, there's nothing to record. */
3892 if (op0 == NULL_RTX || op1 == NULL_RTX)
3893 return;
3894
3895 code = find_comparison_args (code, &op0, &op1, &mode0, &mode1);
3896 if (! cond_known_true)
3897 {
3898 code = reversed_comparison_code_parts (code, op0, op1, insn);
3899
3900 /* Don't remember if we can't find the inverse. */
3901 if (code == UNKNOWN)
3902 return;
3903 }
3904
3905 /* The mode is the mode of the non-constant. */
3906 mode = mode0;
3907 if (mode1 != VOIDmode)
3908 mode = mode1;
3909
3910 record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality);
3911 }
3912
3913 /* Yet another form of subreg creation. In this case, we want something in
3914 MODE, and we should assume OP has MODE iff it is naturally modeless. */
3915
3916 static rtx
3917 record_jump_cond_subreg (machine_mode mode, rtx op)
3918 {
3919 machine_mode op_mode = GET_MODE (op);
3920 if (op_mode == mode || op_mode == VOIDmode)
3921 return op;
3922 return lowpart_subreg (mode, op, op_mode);
3923 }
3924
3925 /* We know that comparison CODE applied to OP0 and OP1 in MODE is true.
3926 REVERSED_NONEQUALITY is nonzero if CODE had to be swapped.
3927 Make any useful entries we can with that information. Called from
3928 above function and called recursively. */
3929
3930 static void
3931 record_jump_cond (enum rtx_code code, machine_mode mode, rtx op0,
3932 rtx op1, int reversed_nonequality)
3933 {
3934 unsigned op0_hash, op1_hash;
3935 int op0_in_memory, op1_in_memory;
3936 struct table_elt *op0_elt, *op1_elt;
3937
3938 /* If OP0 and OP1 are known equal, and either is a paradoxical SUBREG,
3939 we know that they are also equal in the smaller mode (this is also
3940 true for all smaller modes whether or not there is a SUBREG, but
3941 is not worth testing for with no SUBREG). */
3942
3943 /* Note that GET_MODE (op0) may not equal MODE. */
3944 if (code == EQ && paradoxical_subreg_p (op0))
3945 {
3946 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
3947 rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op1);
3948 if (tem)
3949 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0), tem,
3950 reversed_nonequality);
3951 }
3952
3953 if (code == EQ && paradoxical_subreg_p (op1))
3954 {
3955 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
3956 rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op0);
3957 if (tem)
3958 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1), tem,
3959 reversed_nonequality);
3960 }
3961
3962 /* Similarly, if this is an NE comparison, and either is a SUBREG
3963 making a smaller mode, we know the whole thing is also NE. */
3964
3965 /* Note that GET_MODE (op0) may not equal MODE;
3966 if we test MODE instead, we can get an infinite recursion
3967 alternating between two modes each wider than MODE. */
3968
3969 if (code == NE
3970 && partial_subreg_p (op0)
3971 && subreg_lowpart_p (op0))
3972 {
3973 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
3974 rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op1);
3975 if (tem)
3976 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0), tem,
3977 reversed_nonequality);
3978 }
3979
3980 if (code == NE
3981 && partial_subreg_p (op1)
3982 && subreg_lowpart_p (op1))
3983 {
3984 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
3985 rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op0);
3986 if (tem)
3987 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1), tem,
3988 reversed_nonequality);
3989 }
3990
3991 /* Hash both operands. */
3992
3993 do_not_record = 0;
3994 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
3995 op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
3996 op0_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
3997
3998 if (do_not_record)
3999 return;
4000
4001 do_not_record = 0;
4002 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
4003 op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
4004 op1_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
4005
4006 if (do_not_record)
4007 return;
4008
4009 /* Look up both operands. */
4010 op0_elt = lookup (op0, op0_hash, mode);
4011 op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash, mode);
4012
4013 /* If both operands are already equivalent or if they are not in the
4014 table but are identical, do nothing. */
4015 if ((op0_elt != 0 && op1_elt != 0
4016 && op0_elt->first_same_value == op1_elt->first_same_value)
4017 || op0 == op1 || rtx_equal_p (op0, op1))
4018 return;
4019
4020 /* If we aren't setting two things equal all we can do is save this
4021 comparison. Similarly if this is floating-point. In the latter
4022 case, OP1 might be zero and both -0.0 and 0.0 are equal to it.
4023 If we record the equality, we might inadvertently delete code
4024 whose intent was to change -0 to +0. */
4025
4026 if (code != EQ || FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0)))
4027 {
4028 struct qty_table_elem *ent;
4029 int qty;
4030
4031 /* If we reversed a floating-point comparison, if OP0 is not a
4032 register, or if OP1 is neither a register or constant, we can't
4033 do anything. */
4034
4035 if (!REG_P (op1))
4036 op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
4037
4038 if ((reversed_nonequality && FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
4039 || !REG_P (op0) || op1 == 0)
4040 return;
4041
4042 /* Put OP0 in the hash table if it isn't already. This gives it a
4043 new quantity number. */
4044 if (op0_elt == 0)
4045 {
4046 if (insert_regs (op0, NULL, 0))
4047 {
4048 rehash_using_reg (op0);
4049 op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
4050
4051 /* If OP0 is contained in OP1, this changes its hash code
4052 as well. Faster to rehash than to check, except
4053 for the simple case of a constant. */
4054 if (! CONSTANT_P (op1))
4055 op1_hash = HASH (op1,mode);
4056 }
4057
4058 op0_elt = insert (op0, NULL, op0_hash, mode);
4059 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
4060 }
4061
4062 qty = REG_QTY (REGNO (op0));
4063 ent = &qty_table[qty];
4064
4065 ent->comparison_code = code;
4066 if (REG_P (op1))
4067 {
4068 /* Look it up again--in case op0 and op1 are the same. */
4069 op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash, mode);
4070
4071 /* Put OP1 in the hash table so it gets a new quantity number. */
4072 if (op1_elt == 0)
4073 {
4074 if (insert_regs (op1, NULL, 0))
4075 {
4076 rehash_using_reg (op1);
4077 op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
4078 }
4079
4080 op1_elt = insert (op1, NULL, op1_hash, mode);
4081 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
4082 }
4083
4084 ent->comparison_const = NULL_RTX;
4085 ent->comparison_qty = REG_QTY (REGNO (op1));
4086 }
4087 else
4088 {
4089 ent->comparison_const = op1;
4090 ent->comparison_qty = INT_MIN;
4091 }
4092
4093 return;
4094 }
4095
4096 /* If either side is still missing an equivalence, make it now,
4097 then merge the equivalences. */
4098
4099 if (op0_elt == 0)
4100 {
4101 if (insert_regs (op0, NULL, 0))
4102 {
4103 rehash_using_reg (op0);
4104 op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
4105 }
4106
4107 op0_elt = insert (op0, NULL, op0_hash, mode);
4108 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
4109 }
4110
4111 if (op1_elt == 0)
4112 {
4113 if (insert_regs (op1, NULL, 0))
4114 {
4115 rehash_using_reg (op1);
4116 op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
4117 }
4118
4119 op1_elt = insert (op1, NULL, op1_hash, mode);
4120 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
4121 }
4122
4123 merge_equiv_classes (op0_elt, op1_elt);
4124 }
4125
4126 /* CSE processing for one instruction.
4128
4129 Most "true" common subexpressions are mostly optimized away in GIMPLE,
4130 but the few that "leak through" are cleaned up by cse_insn, and complex
4131 addressing modes are often formed here.
4132
4133 The main function is cse_insn, and between here and that function
4134 a couple of helper functions is defined to keep the size of cse_insn
4135 within reasonable proportions.
4136
4137 Data is shared between the main and helper functions via STRUCT SET,
4138 that contains all data related for every set in the instruction that
4139 is being processed.
4140
4141 Note that cse_main processes all sets in the instruction. Most
4142 passes in GCC only process simple SET insns or single_set insns, but
4143 CSE processes insns with multiple sets as well. */
4144
4145 /* Data on one SET contained in the instruction. */
4146
4147 struct set
4148 {
4149 /* The SET rtx itself. */
4150 rtx rtl;
4151 /* The SET_SRC of the rtx (the original value, if it is changing). */
4152 rtx src;
4153 /* The hash-table element for the SET_SRC of the SET. */
4154 struct table_elt *src_elt;
4155 /* Hash value for the SET_SRC. */
4156 unsigned src_hash;
4157 /* Hash value for the SET_DEST. */
4158 unsigned dest_hash;
4159 /* The SET_DEST, with SUBREG, etc., stripped. */
4160 rtx inner_dest;
4161 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in memory. */
4162 char src_in_memory;
4163 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC contains something
4164 whose value cannot be predicted and understood. */
4165 char src_volatile;
4166 /* Original machine mode, in case it becomes a CONST_INT.
4167 The size of this field should match the size of the mode
4168 field of struct rtx_def (see rtl.h). */
4169 ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) mode : 8;
4170 /* Hash value of constant equivalent for SET_SRC. */
4171 unsigned src_const_hash;
4172 /* A constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
4173 rtx src_const;
4174 /* Table entry for constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
4175 struct table_elt *src_const_elt;
4176 /* Table entry for the destination address. */
4177 struct table_elt *dest_addr_elt;
4178 };
4179
4180 /* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1) where REG0 is the
4182 "cheapest", cheaper than REG1. After cse, REG1 will probably not
4183 be used in the sequel, so (if easily done) change this insn to
4184 (set REG1 REG0) and replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn
4185 that computed their value. Then REG1 will become a dead store
4186 and won't cloud the situation for later optimizations.
4187
4188 Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
4189 then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
4190 into a three-operand insn.
4191
4192 This is the last transformation that cse_insn will try to do. */
4193
4194 static void
4195 try_back_substitute_reg (rtx set, rtx_insn *insn)
4196 {
4197 rtx dest = SET_DEST (set);
4198 rtx src = SET_SRC (set);
4199
4200 if (REG_P (dest)
4201 && REG_P (src) && ! HARD_REGISTER_P (src)
4202 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (src)))
4203 {
4204 int src_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (src));
4205 struct qty_table_elem *src_ent = &qty_table[src_q];
4206
4207 if (src_ent->first_reg == REGNO (dest))
4208 {
4209 /* Scan for the previous nonnote insn, but stop at a basic
4210 block boundary. */
4211 rtx_insn *prev = insn;
4212 rtx_insn *bb_head = BB_HEAD (BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn));
4213 do
4214 {
4215 prev = PREV_INSN (prev);
4216 }
4217 while (prev != bb_head && (NOTE_P (prev) || DEBUG_INSN_P (prev)));
4218
4219 /* Do not swap the registers around if the previous instruction
4220 attaches a REG_EQUIV note to REG1.
4221
4222 ??? It's not entirely clear whether we can transfer a REG_EQUIV
4223 from the pseudo that originally shadowed an incoming argument
4224 to another register. Some uses of REG_EQUIV might rely on it
4225 being attached to REG1 rather than REG2.
4226
4227 This section previously turned the REG_EQUIV into a REG_EQUAL
4228 note. We cannot do that because REG_EQUIV may provide an
4229 uninitialized stack slot when REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE is used. */
4230 if (NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev)
4231 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (prev)) == SET
4232 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)) == src
4233 && ! find_reg_note (prev, REG_EQUIV, NULL_RTX))
4234 {
4235 rtx note;
4236
4237 validate_change (prev, &SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)), dest, 1);
4238 validate_change (insn, &SET_DEST (set), src, 1);
4239 validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (set), dest, 1);
4240 apply_change_group ();
4241
4242 /* If INSN has a REG_EQUAL note, and this note mentions
4243 REG0, then we must delete it, because the value in
4244 REG0 has changed. If the note's value is REG1, we must
4245 also delete it because that is now this insn's dest. */
4246 note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX);
4247 if (note != 0
4248 && (reg_mentioned_p (dest, XEXP (note, 0))
4249 || rtx_equal_p (src, XEXP (note, 0))))
4250 remove_note (insn, note);
4251
4252 /* If INSN has a REG_ARGS_SIZE note, move it to PREV. */
4253 note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_ARGS_SIZE, NULL_RTX);
4254 if (note != 0)
4255 {
4256 remove_note (insn, note);
4257 gcc_assert (!find_reg_note (prev, REG_ARGS_SIZE, NULL_RTX));
4258 set_unique_reg_note (prev, REG_ARGS_SIZE, XEXP (note, 0));
4259 }
4260 }
4261 }
4262 }
4263 }
4264
4265 /* Add an entry containing RTL X into SETS. */
4266 static inline void
4267 add_to_set (vec<struct set> *sets, rtx x)
4268 {
4269 struct set entry = {};
4270 entry.rtl = x;
4271 sets->safe_push (entry);
4272 }
4273
4274 /* Record all the SETs in this instruction into SETS_PTR,
4275 and return the number of recorded sets. */
4276 static int
4277 find_sets_in_insn (rtx_insn *insn, vec<struct set> *psets)
4278 {
4279 rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
4280
4281 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
4282 {
4283 /* Ignore SETs that are unconditional jumps.
4284 They never need cse processing, so this does not hurt.
4285 The reason is not efficiency but rather
4286 so that we can test at the end for instructions
4287 that have been simplified to unconditional jumps
4288 and not be misled by unchanged instructions
4289 that were unconditional jumps to begin with. */
4290 if (SET_DEST (x) == pc_rtx
4291 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == LABEL_REF)
4292 ;
4293 /* Don't count call-insns, (set (reg 0) (call ...)), as a set.
4294 The hard function value register is used only once, to copy to
4295 someplace else, so it isn't worth cse'ing. */
4296 else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
4297 ;
4298 else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CONST_VECTOR
4299 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x))) != MODE_VECTOR_BOOL
4300 /* Prevent duplicates from being generated if the type is a V1
4301 type and a subreg. Folding this will result in the same
4302 element as folding x itself. */
4303 && !(SUBREG_P (SET_DEST (x))
4304 && known_eq (GET_MODE_NUNITS (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x))), 1)))
4305 {
4306 /* First register the vector itself. */
4307 add_to_set (psets, x);
4308 rtx src = SET_SRC (x);
4309 /* Go over the constants of the CONST_VECTOR in forward order, to
4310 put them in the same order in the SETS array. */
4311 for (unsigned i = 0; i < const_vector_encoded_nelts (src) ; i++)
4312 {
4313 /* These are templates and don't actually get emitted but are
4314 used to tell CSE how to get to a particular constant. */
4315 rtx y = simplify_gen_vec_select (SET_DEST (x), i);
4316 gcc_assert (y);
4317 add_to_set (psets, gen_rtx_SET (y, CONST_VECTOR_ELT (src, i)));
4318 }
4319 }
4320 else
4321 add_to_set (psets, x);
4322 }
4323 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
4324 {
4325 int i, lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
4326
4327 /* Go over the expressions of the PARALLEL in forward order, to
4328 put them in the same order in the SETS array. */
4329 for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
4330 {
4331 rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
4332 if (GET_CODE (y) == SET)
4333 {
4334 /* As above, we ignore unconditional jumps and call-insns and
4335 ignore the result of apply_change_group. */
4336 if (SET_DEST (y) == pc_rtx
4337 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == LABEL_REF)
4338 ;
4339 else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
4340 ;
4341 else
4342 add_to_set (psets, y);
4343 }
4344 }
4345 }
4346
4347 return psets->length ();
4348 }
4349
4350 /* Subroutine of canonicalize_insn. X is an ASM_OPERANDS in INSN. */
4352
4353 static void
4354 canon_asm_operands (rtx x, rtx_insn *insn)
4355 {
4356 for (int i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4357 {
4358 rtx input = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i);
4359 if (!(REG_P (input) && HARD_REGISTER_P (input)))
4360 {
4361 input = canon_reg (input, insn);
4362 validate_change (insn, &ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i), input, 1);
4363 }
4364 }
4365 }
4366
4367 /* Where possible, substitute every register reference in the N_SETS
4368 number of SETS in INSN with the canonical register.
4369
4370 Register canonicalization propagatest the earliest register (i.e.
4371 one that is set before INSN) with the same value. This is a very
4372 useful, simple form of CSE, to clean up warts from expanding GIMPLE
4373 to RTL. For instance, a CONST for an address is usually expanded
4374 multiple times to loads into different registers, thus creating many
4375 subexpressions of the form:
4376
4377 (set (reg1) (some_const))
4378 (set (mem (... reg1 ...) (thing)))
4379 (set (reg2) (some_const))
4380 (set (mem (... reg2 ...) (thing)))
4381
4382 After canonicalizing, the code takes the following form:
4383
4384 (set (reg1) (some_const))
4385 (set (mem (... reg1 ...) (thing)))
4386 (set (reg2) (some_const))
4387 (set (mem (... reg1 ...) (thing)))
4388
4389 The set to reg2 is now trivially dead, and the memory reference (or
4390 address, or whatever) may be a candidate for further CSEing.
4391
4392 In this function, the result of apply_change_group can be ignored;
4393 see canon_reg. */
4394
4395 static void
4396 canonicalize_insn (rtx_insn *insn, vec<struct set> *psets)
4397 {
4398 vec<struct set> sets = *psets;
4399 int n_sets = sets.length ();
4400 rtx tem;
4401 rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
4402 int i;
4403
4404 if (CALL_P (insn))
4405 {
4406 for (tem = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn); tem; tem = XEXP (tem, 1))
4407 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) != SET)
4408 XEXP (tem, 0) = canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), insn);
4409 }
4410
4411 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
4412 {
4413 canon_reg (SET_SRC (x), insn);
4414 apply_change_group ();
4415 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (x), insn);
4416 }
4417 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
4418 {
4419 /* If we clobber memory, canon the address.
4420 This does nothing when a register is clobbered
4421 because we have already invalidated the reg. */
4422 if (MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
4423 canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), insn);
4424 }
4425 else if (GET_CODE (x) == USE
4426 && ! (REG_P (XEXP (x, 0))
4427 && REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
4428 /* Canonicalize a USE of a pseudo register or memory location. */
4429 canon_reg (x, insn);
4430 else if (GET_CODE (x) == ASM_OPERANDS)
4431 canon_asm_operands (x, insn);
4432 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CALL)
4433 {
4434 canon_reg (x, insn);
4435 apply_change_group ();
4436 fold_rtx (x, insn);
4437 }
4438 else if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
4439 canon_reg (PATTERN (insn), insn);
4440 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
4441 {
4442 for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4443 {
4444 rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
4445 if (GET_CODE (y) == SET && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
4446 {
4447 canon_reg (SET_SRC (y), insn);
4448 apply_change_group ();
4449 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (y), insn);
4450 }
4451 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
4452 {
4453 if (MEM_P (XEXP (y, 0)))
4454 canon_reg (XEXP (y, 0), insn);
4455 }
4456 else if (GET_CODE (y) == USE
4457 && ! (REG_P (XEXP (y, 0))
4458 && REGNO (XEXP (y, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
4459 canon_reg (y, insn);
4460 else if (GET_CODE (y) == ASM_OPERANDS)
4461 canon_asm_operands (y, insn);
4462 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CALL)
4463 {
4464 canon_reg (y, insn);
4465 apply_change_group ();
4466 fold_rtx (y, insn);
4467 }
4468 }
4469 }
4470
4471 if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0
4472 && (tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX)) != 0)
4473 {
4474 /* We potentially will process this insn many times. Therefore,
4475 drop the REG_EQUAL note if it is equal to the SET_SRC of the
4476 unique set in INSN.
4477
4478 Do not do so if the REG_EQUAL note is for a STRICT_LOW_PART,
4479 because cse_insn handles those specially. */
4480 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) != STRICT_LOW_PART
4481 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
4482 remove_note (insn, tem);
4483 else
4484 {
4485 canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), insn);
4486 apply_change_group ();
4487 XEXP (tem, 0) = fold_rtx (XEXP (tem, 0), insn);
4488 df_notes_rescan (insn);
4489 }
4490 }
4491
4492 /* Canonicalize sources and addresses of destinations.
4493 We do this in a separate pass to avoid problems when a MATCH_DUP is
4494 present in the insn pattern. In that case, we want to ensure that
4495 we don't break the duplicate nature of the pattern. So we will replace
4496 both operands at the same time. Otherwise, we would fail to find an
4497 equivalent substitution in the loop calling validate_change below.
4498
4499 We used to suppress canonicalization of DEST if it appears in SRC,
4500 but we don't do this any more. */
4501
4502 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
4503 {
4504 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
4505 rtx src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
4506 rtx new_rtx = canon_reg (src, insn);
4507
4508 validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new_rtx, 1);
4509
4510 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
4511 {
4512 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 1),
4513 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 1), insn), 1);
4514 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 2),
4515 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 2), insn), 1);
4516 }
4517
4518 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
4519 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
4520 || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
4521 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
4522
4523 if (MEM_P (dest))
4524 canon_reg (dest, insn);
4525 }
4526
4527 /* Now that we have done all the replacements, we can apply the change
4528 group and see if they all work. Note that this will cause some
4529 canonicalizations that would have worked individually not to be applied
4530 because some other canonicalization didn't work, but this should not
4531 occur often.
4532
4533 The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see canon_reg. */
4534
4535 apply_change_group ();
4536 }
4537
4538 /* Main function of CSE.
4540 First simplify sources and addresses of all assignments
4541 in the instruction, using previously-computed equivalents values.
4542 Then install the new sources and destinations in the table
4543 of available values. */
4544
4545 static void
4546 cse_insn (rtx_insn *insn)
4547 {
4548 rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
4549 int i;
4550 rtx tem;
4551 int n_sets = 0;
4552
4553 rtx src_eqv = 0;
4554 struct table_elt *src_eqv_elt = 0;
4555 int src_eqv_volatile = 0;
4556 int src_eqv_in_memory = 0;
4557 unsigned src_eqv_hash = 0;
4558
4559 this_insn = insn;
4560
4561 /* Find all regs explicitly clobbered in this insn,
4562 to ensure they are not replaced with any other regs
4563 elsewhere in this insn. */
4564 invalidate_from_sets_and_clobbers (insn);
4565
4566 /* Record all the SETs in this instruction. */
4567 auto_vec<struct set, 8> sets;
4568 n_sets = find_sets_in_insn (insn, (vec<struct set>*)&sets);
4569
4570 /* Substitute the canonical register where possible. */
4571 canonicalize_insn (insn, (vec<struct set>*)&sets);
4572
4573 /* If this insn has a REG_EQUAL note, store the equivalent value in SRC_EQV,
4574 if different, or if the DEST is a STRICT_LOW_PART/ZERO_EXTRACT. The
4575 latter condition is necessary because SRC_EQV is handled specially for
4576 this case, and if it isn't set, then there will be no equivalence
4577 for the destination. */
4578 if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0
4579 && (tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX)) != 0)
4580 {
4581
4582 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) != ZERO_EXTRACT
4583 && (! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
4584 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART))
4585 src_eqv = copy_rtx (XEXP (tem, 0));
4586 /* If DEST is of the form ZERO_EXTACT, as in:
4587 (set (zero_extract:SI (reg:SI 119)
4588 (const_int 16 [0x10])
4589 (const_int 16 [0x10]))
4590 (const_int 51154 [0xc7d2]))
4591 REG_EQUAL note will specify the value of register (reg:SI 119) at this
4592 point. Note that this is different from SRC_EQV. We can however
4593 calculate SRC_EQV with the position and width of ZERO_EXTRACT. */
4594 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
4595 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (tem, 0))
4596 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), 1))
4597 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), 2)))
4598 {
4599 rtx dest_reg = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), 0);
4600 /* This is the mode of XEXP (tem, 0) as well. */
4601 scalar_int_mode dest_mode
4602 = as_a <scalar_int_mode> (GET_MODE (dest_reg));
4603 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), 1);
4604 rtx pos = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), 2);
4605 HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (XEXP (tem, 0));
4606 HOST_WIDE_INT mask;
4607 unsigned int shift;
4608 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
4609 shift = (GET_MODE_PRECISION (dest_mode)
4610 - INTVAL (pos) - INTVAL (width));
4611 else
4612 shift = INTVAL (pos);
4613 if (INTVAL (width) == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
4614 mask = HOST_WIDE_INT_M1;
4615 else
4616 mask = (HOST_WIDE_INT_1 << INTVAL (width)) - 1;
4617 val = (val >> shift) & mask;
4618 src_eqv = GEN_INT (val);
4619 }
4620 }
4621
4622 /* Set sets[i].src_elt to the class each source belongs to.
4623 Detect assignments from or to volatile things
4624 and set set[i] to zero so they will be ignored
4625 in the rest of this function.
4626
4627 Nothing in this loop changes the hash table or the register chains. */
4628
4629 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
4630 {
4631 bool repeat = false;
4632 bool noop_insn = false;
4633 rtx src, dest;
4634 rtx src_folded;
4635 struct table_elt *elt = 0, *p;
4636 machine_mode mode;
4637 rtx src_eqv_here;
4638 rtx src_const = 0;
4639 rtx src_related = 0;
4640 bool src_related_is_const_anchor = false;
4641 struct table_elt *src_const_elt = 0;
4642 int src_cost = MAX_COST;
4643 int src_eqv_cost = MAX_COST;
4644 int src_folded_cost = MAX_COST;
4645 int src_related_cost = MAX_COST;
4646 int src_elt_cost = MAX_COST;
4647 int src_regcost = MAX_COST;
4648 int src_eqv_regcost = MAX_COST;
4649 int src_folded_regcost = MAX_COST;
4650 int src_related_regcost = MAX_COST;
4651 int src_elt_regcost = MAX_COST;
4652 scalar_int_mode int_mode;
4653
4654 dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
4655 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
4656
4657 /* If SRC is a constant that has no machine mode,
4658 hash it with the destination's machine mode.
4659 This way we can keep different modes separate. */
4660
4661 mode = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
4662 sets[i].mode = mode;
4663
4664 if (src_eqv)
4665 {
4666 machine_mode eqvmode = mode;
4667 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
4668 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
4669 do_not_record = 0;
4670 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
4671 src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
4672
4673 /* Find the equivalence class for the equivalent expression. */
4674
4675 if (!do_not_record)
4676 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash, eqvmode);
4677
4678 src_eqv_volatile = do_not_record;
4679 src_eqv_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
4680 }
4681
4682 /* If this is a STRICT_LOW_PART assignment, src_eqv corresponds to the
4683 value of the INNER register, not the destination. So it is not
4684 a valid substitution for the source. But save it for later. */
4685 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
4686 src_eqv_here = 0;
4687 else
4688 src_eqv_here = src_eqv;
4689
4690 /* Simplify and foldable subexpressions in SRC. Then get the fully-
4691 simplified result, which may not necessarily be valid. */
4692 src_folded = fold_rtx (src, NULL);
4693
4694 #if 0
4695 /* ??? This caused bad code to be generated for the m68k port with -O2.
4696 Suppose src is (CONST_INT -1), and that after truncation src_folded
4697 is (CONST_INT 3). Suppose src_folded is then used for src_const.
4698 At the end we will add src and src_const to the same equivalence
4699 class. We now have 3 and -1 on the same equivalence class. This
4700 causes later instructions to be mis-optimized. */
4701 /* If storing a constant in a bitfield, pre-truncate the constant
4702 so we will be able to record it later. */
4703 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
4704 {
4705 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
4706
4707 if (CONST_INT_P (src)
4708 && CONST_INT_P (width)
4709 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
4710 && (INTVAL (src) & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << INTVAL (width))))
4711 src_folded
4712 = GEN_INT (INTVAL (src) & ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1
4713 << INTVAL (width)) - 1));
4714 }
4715 #endif
4716
4717 /* Compute SRC's hash code, and also notice if it
4718 should not be recorded at all. In that case,
4719 prevent any further processing of this assignment.
4720
4721 We set DO_NOT_RECORD if the destination has a REG_UNUSED note.
4722 This avoids getting the source register into the tables, where it
4723 may be invalidated later (via REG_QTY), then trigger an ICE upon
4724 re-insertion.
4725
4726 This is only a problem in multi-set insns. If it were a single
4727 set the dead copy would have been removed. If the RHS were anything
4728 but a simple REG, then we won't call insert_regs and thus there's
4729 no potential for triggering the ICE. */
4730 do_not_record = (REG_P (dest)
4731 && REG_P (src)
4732 && find_reg_note (insn, REG_UNUSED, dest));
4733 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
4734
4735 sets[i].src = src;
4736 sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
4737 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
4738 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
4739
4740 /* If SRC is a MEM, there is a REG_EQUIV note for SRC, and DEST is
4741 a pseudo, do not record SRC. Using SRC as a replacement for
4742 anything else will be incorrect in that situation. Note that
4743 this usually occurs only for stack slots, in which case all the
4744 RTL would be referring to SRC, so we don't lose any optimization
4745 opportunities by not having SRC in the hash table. */
4746
4747 if (MEM_P (src)
4748 && find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUIV, NULL_RTX) != 0
4749 && REG_P (dest)
4750 && REGNO (dest) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
4751 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
4752
4753 else if (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS
4754 && GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
4755 {
4756 /* Do not record result of a non-volatile inline asm with
4757 more than one result. */
4758 if (n_sets > 1)
4759 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
4760
4761 int j, lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
4762 for (j = 0; j < lim; j++)
4763 {
4764 rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, j);
4765 /* And do not record result of a non-volatile inline asm
4766 with "memory" clobber. */
4767 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER && MEM_P (XEXP (y, 0)))
4768 {
4769 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
4770 break;
4771 }
4772 }
4773 }
4774
4775 #if 0
4776 /* It is no longer clear why we used to do this, but it doesn't
4777 appear to still be needed. So let's try without it since this
4778 code hurts cse'ing widened ops. */
4779 /* If source is a paradoxical subreg (such as QI treated as an SI),
4780 treat it as volatile. It may do the work of an SI in one context
4781 where the extra bits are not being used, but cannot replace an SI
4782 in general. */
4783 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (src))
4784 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
4785 #endif
4786
4787 /* Locate all possible equivalent forms for SRC. Try to replace
4788 SRC in the insn with each cheaper equivalent.
4789
4790 We have the following types of equivalents: SRC itself, a folded
4791 version, a value given in a REG_EQUAL note, or a value related
4792 to a constant.
4793
4794 Each of these equivalents may be part of an additional class
4795 of equivalents (if more than one is in the table, they must be in
4796 the same class; we check for this).
4797
4798 If the source is volatile, we don't do any table lookups.
4799
4800 We note any constant equivalent for possible later use in a
4801 REG_NOTE. */
4802
4803 if (!sets[i].src_volatile)
4804 elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
4805
4806 sets[i].src_elt = elt;
4807
4808 if (elt && src_eqv_here && src_eqv_elt)
4809 {
4810 if (elt->first_same_value != src_eqv_elt->first_same_value)
4811 {
4812 /* The REG_EQUAL is indicating that two formerly distinct
4813 classes are now equivalent. So merge them. */
4814 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_eqv_elt);
4815 src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, elt->mode);
4816 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash, elt->mode);
4817 }
4818
4819 src_eqv_here = 0;
4820 }
4821
4822 else if (src_eqv_elt)
4823 elt = src_eqv_elt;
4824
4825 /* Try to find a constant somewhere and record it in `src_const'.
4826 Record its table element, if any, in `src_const_elt'. Look in
4827 any known equivalences first. (If the constant is not in the
4828 table, also set `sets[i].src_const_hash'). */
4829 if (elt)
4830 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
4831 if (p->is_const)
4832 {
4833 src_const = p->exp;
4834 src_const_elt = elt;
4835 break;
4836 }
4837
4838 if (src_const == 0
4839 && (CONSTANT_P (src_folded)
4840 /* Consider (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2)) as
4841 "constant" here so we will record it. This allows us
4842 to fold switch statements when an ADDR_DIFF_VEC is used. */
4843 || (GET_CODE (src_folded) == MINUS
4844 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 0)) == LABEL_REF
4845 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
4846 src_const = src_folded, src_const_elt = elt;
4847 else if (src_const == 0 && src_eqv_here && CONSTANT_P (src_eqv_here))
4848 src_const = src_eqv_here, src_const_elt = src_eqv_elt;
4849
4850 /* If we don't know if the constant is in the table, get its
4851 hash code and look it up. */
4852 if (src_const && src_const_elt == 0)
4853 {
4854 sets[i].src_const_hash = HASH (src_const, mode);
4855 src_const_elt = lookup (src_const, sets[i].src_const_hash, mode);
4856 }
4857
4858 sets[i].src_const = src_const;
4859 sets[i].src_const_elt = src_const_elt;
4860
4861 /* If the constant and our source are both in the table, mark them as
4862 equivalent. Otherwise, if a constant is in the table but the source
4863 isn't, set ELT to it. */
4864 if (src_const_elt && elt
4865 && src_const_elt->first_same_value != elt->first_same_value)
4866 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_const_elt);
4867 else if (src_const_elt && elt == 0)
4868 elt = src_const_elt;
4869
4870 /* See if there is a register linearly related to a constant
4871 equivalent of SRC. */
4872 if (src_const
4873 && (GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
4874 || (src_const_elt && src_const_elt->related_value != 0)))
4875 {
4876 src_related = use_related_value (src_const, src_const_elt);
4877 if (src_related)
4878 {
4879 struct table_elt *src_related_elt
4880 = lookup (src_related, HASH (src_related, mode), mode);
4881 if (src_related_elt && elt)
4882 {
4883 if (elt->first_same_value
4884 != src_related_elt->first_same_value)
4885 /* This can occur when we previously saw a CONST
4886 involving a SYMBOL_REF and then see the SYMBOL_REF
4887 twice. Merge the involved classes. */
4888 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_related_elt);
4889
4890 src_related = 0;
4891 src_related_elt = 0;
4892 }
4893 else if (src_related_elt && elt == 0)
4894 elt = src_related_elt;
4895 }
4896 }
4897
4898 /* See if we have a CONST_INT that is already in a register in a
4899 wider mode. */
4900
4901 if (src_const && src_related == 0 && CONST_INT_P (src_const)
4902 && is_int_mode (mode, &int_mode)
4903 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode) < BITS_PER_WORD)
4904 {
4905 opt_scalar_int_mode wider_mode_iter;
4906 FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode_iter, int_mode)
4907 {
4908 scalar_int_mode wider_mode = wider_mode_iter.require ();
4909 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (wider_mode) > BITS_PER_WORD)
4910 break;
4911
4912 struct table_elt *const_elt
4913 = lookup (src_const, HASH (src_const, wider_mode), wider_mode);
4914
4915 if (const_elt == 0)
4916 continue;
4917
4918 for (const_elt = const_elt->first_same_value;
4919 const_elt; const_elt = const_elt->next_same_value)
4920 if (REG_P (const_elt->exp))
4921 {
4922 src_related = gen_lowpart (int_mode, const_elt->exp);
4923 break;
4924 }
4925
4926 if (src_related != 0)
4927 break;
4928 }
4929 }
4930
4931 /* Another possibility is that we have an AND with a constant in
4932 a mode narrower than a word. If so, it might have been generated
4933 as part of an "if" which would narrow the AND. If we already
4934 have done the AND in a wider mode, we can use a SUBREG of that
4935 value. */
4936
4937 if (flag_expensive_optimizations && ! src_related
4938 && is_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode, &int_mode)
4939 && GET_CODE (src) == AND && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (src, 1))
4940 && GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
4941 {
4942 opt_scalar_int_mode tmode_iter;
4943 rtx new_and = gen_rtx_AND (VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, XEXP (src, 1));
4944
4945 FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (tmode_iter, int_mode)
4946 {
4947 scalar_int_mode tmode = tmode_iter.require ();
4948 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > UNITS_PER_WORD)
4949 break;
4950
4951 rtx inner = gen_lowpart (tmode, XEXP (src, 0));
4952 struct table_elt *larger_elt;
4953
4954 if (inner)
4955 {
4956 PUT_MODE (new_and, tmode);
4957 XEXP (new_and, 0) = inner;
4958 larger_elt = lookup (new_and, HASH (new_and, tmode), tmode);
4959 if (larger_elt == 0)
4960 continue;
4961
4962 for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
4963 larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
4964 if (REG_P (larger_elt->exp))
4965 {
4966 src_related
4967 = gen_lowpart (int_mode, larger_elt->exp);
4968 break;
4969 }
4970
4971 if (src_related)
4972 break;
4973 }
4974 }
4975 }
4976
4977 /* See if a MEM has already been loaded with a widening operation;
4978 if it has, we can use a subreg of that. Many CISC machines
4979 also have such operations, but this is only likely to be
4980 beneficial on these machines. */
4981
4982 rtx_code extend_op;
4983 if (flag_expensive_optimizations && src_related == 0
4984 && MEM_P (src) && ! do_not_record
4985 && is_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode, &int_mode)
4986 && (extend_op = load_extend_op (int_mode)) != UNKNOWN)
4987 {
4988 struct rtx_def memory_extend_buf;
4989 rtx memory_extend_rtx = &memory_extend_buf;
4990
4991 /* Set what we are trying to extend and the operation it might
4992 have been extended with. */
4993 memset (memory_extend_rtx, 0, sizeof (*memory_extend_rtx));
4994 PUT_CODE (memory_extend_rtx, extend_op);
4995 XEXP (memory_extend_rtx, 0) = src;
4996
4997 opt_scalar_int_mode tmode_iter;
4998 FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (tmode_iter, int_mode)
4999 {
5000 struct table_elt *larger_elt;
5001
5002 scalar_int_mode tmode = tmode_iter.require ();
5003 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > UNITS_PER_WORD)
5004 break;
5005
5006 PUT_MODE (memory_extend_rtx, tmode);
5007 larger_elt = lookup (memory_extend_rtx,
5008 HASH (memory_extend_rtx, tmode), tmode);
5009 if (larger_elt == 0)
5010 continue;
5011
5012 for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
5013 larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
5014 if (REG_P (larger_elt->exp))
5015 {
5016 src_related = gen_lowpart (int_mode, larger_elt->exp);
5017 break;
5018 }
5019
5020 if (src_related)
5021 break;
5022 }
5023 }
5024
5025 /* Try to express the constant using a register+offset expression
5026 derived from a constant anchor. */
5027
5028 if (targetm.const_anchor
5029 && !src_related
5030 && src_const
5031 && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT)
5032 {
5033 src_related = try_const_anchors (src_const, mode);
5034 src_related_is_const_anchor = src_related != NULL_RTX;
5035 }
5036
5037 /* Try to re-materialize a vec_dup with an existing constant. */
5038 rtx src_elt;
5039 if ((!src_eqv_here || CONSTANT_P (src_eqv_here))
5040 && const_vec_duplicate_p (src, &src_elt))
5041 {
5042 machine_mode const_mode = GET_MODE_INNER (GET_MODE (src));
5043 struct table_elt *related_elt
5044 = lookup (src_elt, HASH (src_elt, const_mode), const_mode);
5045 if (related_elt)
5046 {
5047 for (related_elt = related_elt->first_same_value;
5048 related_elt; related_elt = related_elt->next_same_value)
5049 if (REG_P (related_elt->exp))
5050 {
5051 /* We don't need to compare costs with an existing (constant)
5052 src_eqv_here, since any such src_eqv_here should already be
5053 available in src_const. */
5054 src_eqv_here
5055 = gen_rtx_VEC_DUPLICATE (GET_MODE (src),
5056 related_elt->exp);
5057 break;
5058 }
5059 }
5060 }
5061
5062 if (src == src_folded)
5063 src_folded = 0;
5064
5065 /* At this point, ELT, if nonzero, points to a class of expressions
5066 equivalent to the source of this SET and SRC, SRC_EQV, SRC_FOLDED,
5067 and SRC_RELATED, if nonzero, each contain additional equivalent
5068 expressions. Prune these latter expressions by deleting expressions
5069 already in the equivalence class.
5070
5071 Check for an equivalent identical to the destination. If found,
5072 this is the preferred equivalent since it will likely lead to
5073 elimination of the insn. Indicate this by placing it in
5074 `src_related'. */
5075
5076 if (elt)
5077 elt = elt->first_same_value;
5078 for (p = elt; p; p = p->next_same_value)
5079 {
5080 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (p->exp);
5081
5082 /* If the expression is not valid, ignore it. Then we do not
5083 have to check for validity below. In most cases, we can use
5084 `rtx_equal_p', since canonicalization has already been done. */
5085 if (code != REG && ! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
5086 continue;
5087
5088 /* Also skip paradoxical subregs, unless that's what we're
5089 looking for. */
5090 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (p->exp)
5091 && ! (src != 0
5092 && GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
5093 && GET_MODE (src) == GET_MODE (p->exp)
5094 && partial_subreg_p (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)),
5095 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (p->exp)))))
5096 continue;
5097
5098 if (src && GET_CODE (src) == code && rtx_equal_p (src, p->exp))
5099 src = 0;
5100 else if (src_folded && GET_CODE (src_folded) == code
5101 && rtx_equal_p (src_folded, p->exp))
5102 src_folded = 0;
5103 else if (src_eqv_here && GET_CODE (src_eqv_here) == code
5104 && rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, p->exp))
5105 src_eqv_here = 0;
5106 else if (src_related && GET_CODE (src_related) == code
5107 && rtx_equal_p (src_related, p->exp))
5108 src_related = 0;
5109
5110 /* This is the same as the destination of the insns, we want
5111 to prefer it. Copy it to src_related. The code below will
5112 then give it a negative cost. */
5113 if (GET_CODE (dest) == code && rtx_equal_p (p->exp, dest))
5114 src_related = p->exp;
5115 }
5116
5117 /* Find the cheapest valid equivalent, trying all the available
5118 possibilities. Prefer items not in the hash table to ones
5119 that are when they are equal cost. Note that we can never
5120 worsen an insn as the current contents will also succeed.
5121 If we find an equivalent identical to the destination, use it as best,
5122 since this insn will probably be eliminated in that case. */
5123 if (src)
5124 {
5125 if (rtx_equal_p (src, dest))
5126 src_cost = src_regcost = -1;
5127 else
5128 {
5129 src_cost = COST (src, mode);
5130 src_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src);
5131 }
5132 }
5133
5134 if (src_eqv_here)
5135 {
5136 if (rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, dest))
5137 src_eqv_cost = src_eqv_regcost = -1;
5138 else
5139 {
5140 src_eqv_cost = COST (src_eqv_here, mode);
5141 src_eqv_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src_eqv_here);
5142 }
5143 }
5144
5145 if (src_folded)
5146 {
5147 if (rtx_equal_p (src_folded, dest))
5148 src_folded_cost = src_folded_regcost = -1;
5149 else
5150 {
5151 src_folded_cost = COST (src_folded, mode);
5152 src_folded_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src_folded);
5153 }
5154 }
5155
5156 if (src_related)
5157 {
5158 if (rtx_equal_p (src_related, dest))
5159 src_related_cost = src_related_regcost = -1;
5160 else
5161 {
5162 src_related_cost = COST (src_related, mode);
5163 src_related_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src_related);
5164
5165 /* If a const-anchor is used to synthesize a constant that
5166 normally requires multiple instructions then slightly prefer
5167 it over the original sequence. These instructions are likely
5168 to become redundant now. We can't compare against the cost
5169 of src_eqv_here because, on MIPS for example, multi-insn
5170 constants have zero cost; they are assumed to be hoisted from
5171 loops. */
5172 if (src_related_is_const_anchor
5173 && src_related_cost == src_cost
5174 && src_eqv_here)
5175 src_related_cost--;
5176 }
5177 }
5178
5179 /* If this was an indirect jump insn, a known label will really be
5180 cheaper even though it looks more expensive. */
5181 if (dest == pc_rtx && src_const && GET_CODE (src_const) == LABEL_REF)
5182 src_folded = src_const, src_folded_cost = src_folded_regcost = -1;
5183
5184 /* Terminate loop when replacement made. This must terminate since
5185 the current contents will be tested and will always be valid. */
5186 while (1)
5187 {
5188 rtx trial;
5189
5190 /* Skip invalid entries. */
5191 while (elt && !REG_P (elt->exp)
5192 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, false))
5193 elt = elt->next_same_value;
5194
5195 /* A paradoxical subreg would be bad here: it'll be the right
5196 size, but later may be adjusted so that the upper bits aren't
5197 what we want. So reject it. */
5198 if (elt != 0
5199 && paradoxical_subreg_p (elt->exp)
5200 /* It is okay, though, if the rtx we're trying to match
5201 will ignore any of the bits we can't predict. */
5202 && ! (src != 0
5203 && GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
5204 && GET_MODE (src) == GET_MODE (elt->exp)
5205 && partial_subreg_p (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)),
5206 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp)))))
5207 {
5208 elt = elt->next_same_value;
5209 continue;
5210 }
5211
5212 if (elt)
5213 {
5214 src_elt_cost = elt->cost;
5215 src_elt_regcost = elt->regcost;
5216 }
5217
5218 /* Find cheapest and skip it for the next time. For items
5219 of equal cost, use this order:
5220 src_folded, src, src_eqv, src_related and hash table entry. */
5221 if (src_folded
5222 && preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
5223 src_cost, src_regcost) <= 0
5224 && preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
5225 src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost) <= 0
5226 && preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
5227 src_related_cost, src_related_regcost) <= 0
5228 && preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
5229 src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
5230 trial = src_folded, src_folded_cost = MAX_COST;
5231 else if (src
5232 && preferable (src_cost, src_regcost,
5233 src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost) <= 0
5234 && preferable (src_cost, src_regcost,
5235 src_related_cost, src_related_regcost) <= 0
5236 && preferable (src_cost, src_regcost,
5237 src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
5238 trial = src, src_cost = MAX_COST;
5239 else if (src_eqv_here
5240 && preferable (src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost,
5241 src_related_cost, src_related_regcost) <= 0
5242 && preferable (src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost,
5243 src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
5244 trial = src_eqv_here, src_eqv_cost = MAX_COST;
5245 else if (src_related
5246 && preferable (src_related_cost, src_related_regcost,
5247 src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
5248 trial = src_related, src_related_cost = MAX_COST;
5249 else
5250 {
5251 trial = elt->exp;
5252 elt = elt->next_same_value;
5253 src_elt_cost = MAX_COST;
5254 }
5255
5256 /* Try to optimize
5257 (set (reg:M N) (const_int A))
5258 (set (reg:M2 O) (const_int B))
5259 (set (zero_extract:M2 (reg:M N) (const_int C) (const_int D))
5260 (reg:M2 O)). */
5261 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
5262 && CONST_INT_P (trial)
5263 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1))
5264 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 2))
5265 && REG_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 0))
5266 && (known_ge
5267 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))),
5268 INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1))))
5269 && ((unsigned) INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1))
5270 + (unsigned) INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 2))
5271 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT))
5272 {
5273 rtx dest_reg = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 0);
5274 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
5275 rtx pos = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 2);
5276 unsigned int dest_hash = HASH (dest_reg, GET_MODE (dest_reg));
5277 struct table_elt *dest_elt
5278 = lookup (dest_reg, dest_hash, GET_MODE (dest_reg));
5279 rtx dest_cst = NULL;
5280
5281 if (dest_elt)
5282 for (p = dest_elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
5283 if (p->is_const && CONST_INT_P (p->exp))
5284 {
5285 dest_cst = p->exp;
5286 break;
5287 }
5288 if (dest_cst)
5289 {
5290 HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (dest_cst);
5291 HOST_WIDE_INT mask;
5292 unsigned int shift;
5293 /* This is the mode of DEST_CST as well. */
5294 scalar_int_mode dest_mode
5295 = as_a <scalar_int_mode> (GET_MODE (dest_reg));
5296 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
5297 shift = GET_MODE_PRECISION (dest_mode)
5298 - INTVAL (pos) - INTVAL (width);
5299 else
5300 shift = INTVAL (pos);
5301 if (INTVAL (width) == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
5302 mask = HOST_WIDE_INT_M1;
5303 else
5304 mask = (HOST_WIDE_INT_1 << INTVAL (width)) - 1;
5305 val &= ~(mask << shift);
5306 val |= (INTVAL (trial) & mask) << shift;
5307 val = trunc_int_for_mode (val, dest_mode);
5308 validate_unshare_change (insn, &SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl),
5309 dest_reg, 1);
5310 validate_unshare_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl),
5311 GEN_INT (val), 1);
5312 if (apply_change_group ())
5313 {
5314 rtx note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX);
5315 if (note)
5316 {
5317 remove_note (insn, note);
5318 df_notes_rescan (insn);
5319 }
5320 src_eqv = NULL_RTX;
5321 src_eqv_elt = NULL;
5322 src_eqv_volatile = 0;
5323 src_eqv_in_memory = 0;
5324 src_eqv_hash = 0;
5325 repeat = true;
5326 break;
5327 }
5328 }
5329 }
5330
5331 /* We don't normally have an insn matching (set (pc) (pc)), so
5332 check for this separately here. We will delete such an
5333 insn below.
5334
5335 For other cases such as a table jump or conditional jump
5336 where we know the ultimate target, go ahead and replace the
5337 operand. While that may not make a valid insn, we will
5338 reemit the jump below (and also insert any necessary
5339 barriers). */
5340 if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx
5341 && (trial == pc_rtx
5342 || (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
5343 && ! condjump_p (insn))))
5344 {
5345 /* Don't substitute non-local labels, this confuses CFG. */
5346 if (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
5347 && LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (trial))
5348 continue;
5349
5350 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
5351 cse_jumps_altered = true;
5352 break;
5353 }
5354
5355 /* Similarly, lots of targets don't allow no-op
5356 (set (mem x) (mem x)) moves. Even (set (reg x) (reg x))
5357 might be impossible for certain registers (like CC registers). */
5358 else if (n_sets == 1
5359 && !CALL_P (insn)
5360 && (MEM_P (trial) || REG_P (trial))
5361 && rtx_equal_p (trial, dest)
5362 && !side_effects_p (dest)
5363 && (cfun->can_delete_dead_exceptions
5364 || insn_nothrow_p (insn))
5365 /* We can only remove the later store if the earlier aliases
5366 at least all accesses the later one. */
5367 && (!MEM_P (trial)
5368 || ((MEM_ALIAS_SET (dest) == MEM_ALIAS_SET (trial)
5369 || alias_set_subset_of (MEM_ALIAS_SET (dest),
5370 MEM_ALIAS_SET (trial)))
5371 && (!MEM_EXPR (trial)
5372 || refs_same_for_tbaa_p (MEM_EXPR (trial),
5373 MEM_EXPR (dest))))))
5374 {
5375 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
5376 noop_insn = true;
5377 break;
5378 }
5379
5380 /* Reject certain invalid forms of CONST that we create. */
5381 else if (CONSTANT_P (trial)
5382 && GET_CODE (trial) == CONST
5383 /* Reject cases that will cause decode_rtx_const to
5384 die. On the alpha when simplifying a switch, we
5385 get (const (truncate (minus (label_ref)
5386 (label_ref)))). */
5387 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (trial, 0)) == TRUNCATE
5388 /* Likewise on IA-64, except without the
5389 truncate. */
5390 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (trial, 0)) == MINUS
5391 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (trial, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
5392 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (trial, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
5393 /* Do nothing for this case. */
5394 ;
5395
5396 /* Do not replace anything with a MEM, except the replacement
5397 is a no-op. This allows this loop to terminate. */
5398 else if (MEM_P (trial) && !rtx_equal_p (trial, SET_SRC(sets[i].rtl)))
5399 /* Do nothing for this case. */
5400 ;
5401
5402 /* Look for a substitution that makes a valid insn. */
5403 else if (validate_unshare_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl),
5404 trial, 0))
5405 {
5406 rtx new_rtx = canon_reg (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), insn);
5407
5408 /* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see
5409 canon_reg. */
5410
5411 validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new_rtx, 1);
5412 apply_change_group ();
5413
5414 break;
5415 }
5416
5417 /* If the current function uses a constant pool and this is a
5418 constant, try making a pool entry. Put it in src_folded
5419 unless we already have done this since that is where it
5420 likely came from. */
5421
5422 else if (crtl->uses_const_pool
5423 && CONSTANT_P (trial)
5424 && !CONST_INT_P (trial)
5425 && (src_folded == 0 || !MEM_P (src_folded))
5426 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC
5427 && mode != VOIDmode)
5428 {
5429 src_folded = force_const_mem (mode, trial);
5430 if (src_folded)
5431 {
5432 src_folded_cost = COST (src_folded, mode);
5433 src_folded_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src_folded);
5434 }
5435 }
5436 }
5437
5438 /* If we changed the insn too much, handle this set from scratch. */
5439 if (repeat)
5440 {
5441 i--;
5442 continue;
5443 }
5444
5445 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
5446
5447 /* In general, it is good to have a SET with SET_SRC == SET_DEST.
5448 However, there is an important exception: If both are registers
5449 that are not the head of their equivalence class, replace SET_SRC
5450 with the head of the class. If we do not do this, we will have
5451 both registers live over a portion of the basic block. This way,
5452 their lifetimes will likely abut instead of overlapping. */
5453 if (REG_P (dest)
5454 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest)))
5455 {
5456 int dest_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (dest));
5457 struct qty_table_elem *dest_ent = &qty_table[dest_q];
5458
5459 if (dest_ent->mode == GET_MODE (dest)
5460 && dest_ent->first_reg != REGNO (dest)
5461 && REG_P (src) && REGNO (src) == REGNO (dest)
5462 /* Don't do this if the original insn had a hard reg as
5463 SET_SRC or SET_DEST. */
5464 && (!REG_P (sets[i].src)
5465 || REGNO (sets[i].src) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
5466 && (!REG_P (dest) || REGNO (dest) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
5467 /* We can't call canon_reg here because it won't do anything if
5468 SRC is a hard register. */
5469 {
5470 int src_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (src));
5471 struct qty_table_elem *src_ent = &qty_table[src_q];
5472 int first = src_ent->first_reg;
5473 rtx new_src
5474 = (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5475 ? regno_reg_rtx[first] : gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (src), first));
5476
5477 /* We must use validate-change even for this, because this
5478 might be a special no-op instruction, suitable only to
5479 tag notes onto. */
5480 if (validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new_src, 0))
5481 {
5482 src = new_src;
5483 /* If we had a constant that is cheaper than what we are now
5484 setting SRC to, use that constant. We ignored it when we
5485 thought we could make this into a no-op. */
5486 if (src_const && COST (src_const, mode) < COST (src, mode)
5487 && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl),
5488 src_const, 0))
5489 src = src_const;
5490 }
5491 }
5492 }
5493
5494 /* If we made a change, recompute SRC values. */
5495 if (src != sets[i].src)
5496 {
5497 do_not_record = 0;
5498 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5499 sets[i].src = src;
5500 sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
5501 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
5502 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5503 sets[i].src_elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
5504 }
5505
5506 /* If this is a single SET, we are setting a register, and we have an
5507 equivalent constant, we want to add a REG_EQUAL note if the constant
5508 is different from the source. We don't want to do it for a constant
5509 pseudo since verifying that this pseudo hasn't been eliminated is a
5510 pain; moreover such a note won't help anything.
5511
5512 Avoid a REG_EQUAL note for (CONST (MINUS (LABEL_REF) (LABEL_REF)))
5513 which can be created for a reference to a compile time computable
5514 entry in a jump table. */
5515 if (n_sets == 1
5516 && REG_P (dest)
5517 && src_const
5518 && !REG_P (src_const)
5519 && !(GET_CODE (src_const) == SUBREG
5520 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (src_const)))
5521 && !(GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
5522 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_const, 0)) == MINUS
5523 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (src_const, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
5524 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (src_const, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)
5525 && !rtx_equal_p (src, src_const))
5526 {
5527 /* Make sure that the rtx is not shared. */
5528 src_const = copy_rtx (src_const);
5529
5530 /* Record the actual constant value in a REG_EQUAL note,
5531 making a new one if one does not already exist. */
5532 set_unique_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, src_const);
5533 df_notes_rescan (insn);
5534 }
5535
5536 /* Now deal with the destination. */
5537 do_not_record = 0;
5538
5539 /* Look within any ZERO_EXTRACT to the MEM or REG within it. */
5540 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
5541 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
5542 || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5543 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
5544
5545 sets[i].inner_dest = dest;
5546
5547 if (MEM_P (dest))
5548 {
5549 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
5550 /* Stack pushes invalidate the stack pointer. */
5551 rtx addr = XEXP (dest, 0);
5552 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (addr)) == RTX_AUTOINC
5553 && XEXP (addr, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx)
5554 invalidate (stack_pointer_rtx, VOIDmode);
5555 #endif
5556 dest = fold_rtx (dest, insn);
5557 }
5558
5559 /* Compute the hash code of the destination now,
5560 before the effects of this instruction are recorded,
5561 since the register values used in the address computation
5562 are those before this instruction. */
5563 sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, mode);
5564
5565 /* Don't enter a bit-field in the hash table
5566 because the value in it after the store
5567 may not equal what was stored, due to truncation. */
5568
5569 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
5570 {
5571 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
5572
5573 if (src_const != 0 && CONST_INT_P (src_const)
5574 && CONST_INT_P (width)
5575 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
5576 && ! (INTVAL (src_const)
5577 & (HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U << INTVAL (width))))
5578 /* Exception: if the value is constant,
5579 and it won't be truncated, record it. */
5580 ;
5581 else
5582 {
5583 /* This is chosen so that the destination will be invalidated
5584 but no new value will be recorded.
5585 We must invalidate because sometimes constant
5586 values can be recorded for bitfields. */
5587 sets[i].src_elt = 0;
5588 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
5589 src_eqv = 0;
5590 src_eqv_elt = 0;
5591 }
5592 }
5593
5594 /* If only one set in a JUMP_INSN and it is now a no-op, we can delete
5595 the insn. */
5596 else if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx && src == pc_rtx)
5597 {
5598 /* One less use of the label this insn used to jump to. */
5599 cse_cfg_altered |= delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
5600 cse_jumps_altered = true;
5601 /* No more processing for this set. */
5602 sets[i].rtl = 0;
5603 }
5604
5605 /* Similarly for no-op moves. */
5606 else if (noop_insn)
5607 {
5608 if (cfun->can_throw_non_call_exceptions && can_throw_internal (insn))
5609 cse_cfg_altered = true;
5610 cse_cfg_altered |= delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
5611 /* No more processing for this set. */
5612 sets[i].rtl = 0;
5613 }
5614
5615 /* If this SET is now setting PC to a label, we know it used to
5616 be a conditional or computed branch. */
5617 else if (dest == pc_rtx && GET_CODE (src) == LABEL_REF
5618 && !LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (src))
5619 {
5620 /* We reemit the jump in as many cases as possible just in
5621 case the form of an unconditional jump is significantly
5622 different than a computed jump or conditional jump.
5623
5624 If this insn has multiple sets, then reemitting the
5625 jump is nontrivial. So instead we just force rerecognition
5626 and hope for the best. */
5627 if (n_sets == 1)
5628 {
5629 rtx_jump_insn *new_rtx;
5630 rtx note;
5631
5632 rtx_insn *seq = targetm.gen_jump (XEXP (src, 0));
5633 new_rtx = emit_jump_insn_before (seq, insn);
5634 JUMP_LABEL (new_rtx) = XEXP (src, 0);
5635 LABEL_NUSES (XEXP (src, 0))++;
5636
5637 /* Make sure to copy over REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO. */
5638 note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO, 0);
5639 if (note)
5640 {
5641 XEXP (note, 1) = NULL_RTX;
5642 REG_NOTES (new_rtx) = note;
5643 }
5644
5645 cse_cfg_altered |= delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
5646 insn = new_rtx;
5647 }
5648 else
5649 INSN_CODE (insn) = -1;
5650
5651 /* Do not bother deleting any unreachable code, let jump do it. */
5652 cse_jumps_altered = true;
5653 sets[i].rtl = 0;
5654 }
5655
5656 /* If destination is volatile, invalidate it and then do no further
5657 processing for this assignment. */
5658
5659 else if (do_not_record)
5660 {
5661 invalidate_dest (dest);
5662 sets[i].rtl = 0;
5663 }
5664
5665 if (sets[i].rtl != 0 && dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))
5666 {
5667 do_not_record = 0;
5668 sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), mode);
5669 if (do_not_record)
5670 {
5671 invalidate_dest (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
5672 sets[i].rtl = 0;
5673 }
5674 }
5675 }
5676
5677 /* Now enter all non-volatile source expressions in the hash table
5678 if they are not already present.
5679 Record their equivalence classes in src_elt.
5680 This way we can insert the corresponding destinations into
5681 the same classes even if the actual sources are no longer in them
5682 (having been invalidated). */
5683
5684 if (src_eqv && src_eqv_elt == 0 && sets[0].rtl != 0 && ! src_eqv_volatile
5685 && ! rtx_equal_p (src_eqv, SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)))
5686 {
5687 struct table_elt *elt;
5688 struct table_elt *classp = sets[0].src_elt;
5689 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
5690 machine_mode eqvmode = GET_MODE (dest);
5691
5692 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5693 {
5694 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
5695 classp = 0;
5696 }
5697 if (insert_regs (src_eqv, classp, 0))
5698 {
5699 rehash_using_reg (src_eqv);
5700 src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
5701 }
5702 elt = insert (src_eqv, classp, src_eqv_hash, eqvmode);
5703 elt->in_memory = src_eqv_in_memory;
5704 src_eqv_elt = elt;
5705
5706 /* Check to see if src_eqv_elt is the same as a set source which
5707 does not yet have an elt, and if so set the elt of the set source
5708 to src_eqv_elt. */
5709 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5710 if (sets[i].rtl && sets[i].src_elt == 0
5711 && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), src_eqv))
5712 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
5713 }
5714
5715 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5716 if (sets[i].rtl && ! sets[i].src_volatile
5717 && ! rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)))
5718 {
5719 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5720 {
5721 /* REG_EQUAL in setting a STRICT_LOW_PART
5722 gives an equivalent for the entire destination register,
5723 not just for the subreg being stored in now.
5724 This is a more interesting equivalence, so we arrange later
5725 to treat the entire reg as the destination. */
5726 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
5727 sets[i].src_hash = src_eqv_hash;
5728 }
5729 else
5730 {
5731 /* Insert source and constant equivalent into hash table, if not
5732 already present. */
5733 struct table_elt *classp = src_eqv_elt;
5734 rtx src = sets[i].src;
5735 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5736 machine_mode mode
5737 = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
5738
5739 /* It's possible that we have a source value known to be
5740 constant but don't have a REG_EQUAL note on the insn.
5741 Lack of a note will mean src_eqv_elt will be NULL. This
5742 can happen where we've generated a SUBREG to access a
5743 CONST_INT that is already in a register in a wider mode.
5744 Ensure that the source expression is put in the proper
5745 constant class. */
5746 if (!classp)
5747 classp = sets[i].src_const_elt;
5748
5749 if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
5750 {
5751 struct table_elt *elt;
5752
5753 /* Note that these insert_regs calls cannot remove
5754 any of the src_elt's, because they would have failed to
5755 match if not still valid. */
5756 if (insert_regs (src, classp, 0))
5757 {
5758 rehash_using_reg (src);
5759 sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
5760 }
5761 elt = insert (src, classp, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
5762 elt->in_memory = sets[i].src_in_memory;
5763 /* If inline asm has any clobbers, ensure we only reuse
5764 existing inline asms and never try to put the ASM_OPERANDS
5765 into an insn that isn't inline asm. */
5766 if (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS
5767 && GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
5768 elt->cost = MAX_COST;
5769 sets[i].src_elt = classp = elt;
5770 }
5771 if (sets[i].src_const && sets[i].src_const_elt == 0
5772 && src != sets[i].src_const
5773 && ! rtx_equal_p (sets[i].src_const, src))
5774 sets[i].src_elt = insert (sets[i].src_const, classp,
5775 sets[i].src_const_hash, mode);
5776 }
5777 }
5778 else if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
5779 /* If we did not insert the source into the hash table (e.g., it was
5780 volatile), note the equivalence class for the REG_EQUAL value, if any,
5781 so that the destination goes into that class. */
5782 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
5783
5784 /* Record destination addresses in the hash table. This allows us to
5785 check if they are invalidated by other sets. */
5786 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5787 {
5788 if (sets[i].rtl)
5789 {
5790 rtx x = sets[i].inner_dest;
5791 struct table_elt *elt;
5792 machine_mode mode;
5793 unsigned hash;
5794
5795 if (MEM_P (x))
5796 {
5797 x = XEXP (x, 0);
5798 mode = GET_MODE (x);
5799 hash = HASH (x, mode);
5800 elt = lookup (x, hash, mode);
5801 if (!elt)
5802 {
5803 if (insert_regs (x, NULL, 0))
5804 {
5805 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5806
5807 rehash_using_reg (x);
5808 hash = HASH (x, mode);
5809 sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
5810 }
5811 elt = insert (x, NULL, hash, mode);
5812 }
5813
5814 sets[i].dest_addr_elt = elt;
5815 }
5816 else
5817 sets[i].dest_addr_elt = NULL;
5818 }
5819 }
5820
5821 invalidate_from_clobbers (insn);
5822
5823 /* Some registers are invalidated by subroutine calls. Memory is
5824 invalidated by non-constant calls. */
5825
5826 if (CALL_P (insn))
5827 {
5828 if (!(RTL_CONST_OR_PURE_CALL_P (insn)))
5829 invalidate_memory ();
5830 else
5831 /* For const/pure calls, invalidate any argument slots, because
5832 those are owned by the callee. */
5833 for (tem = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn); tem; tem = XEXP (tem, 1))
5834 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == USE
5835 && MEM_P (XEXP (XEXP (tem, 0), 0)))
5836 invalidate (XEXP (XEXP (tem, 0), 0), VOIDmode);
5837 invalidate_for_call (insn);
5838 }
5839
5840 /* Now invalidate everything set by this instruction.
5841 If a SUBREG or other funny destination is being set,
5842 sets[i].rtl is still nonzero, so here we invalidate the reg
5843 a part of which is being set. */
5844
5845 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5846 if (sets[i].rtl)
5847 {
5848 /* We can't use the inner dest, because the mode associated with
5849 a ZERO_EXTRACT is significant. */
5850 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5851
5852 /* Needed for registers to remove the register from its
5853 previous quantity's chain.
5854 Needed for memory if this is a nonvarying address, unless
5855 we have just done an invalidate_memory that covers even those. */
5856 if (REG_P (dest) || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
5857 invalidate (dest, VOIDmode);
5858 else if (MEM_P (dest))
5859 invalidate (dest, VOIDmode);
5860 else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
5861 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
5862 invalidate (XEXP (dest, 0), GET_MODE (dest));
5863 }
5864
5865 /* Don't cse over a call to setjmp; on some machines (eg VAX)
5866 the regs restored by the longjmp come from a later time
5867 than the setjmp. */
5868 if (CALL_P (insn) && find_reg_note (insn, REG_SETJMP, NULL))
5869 {
5870 flush_hash_table ();
5871 goto done;
5872 }
5873
5874 /* Make sure registers mentioned in destinations
5875 are safe for use in an expression to be inserted.
5876 This removes from the hash table
5877 any invalid entry that refers to one of these registers.
5878
5879 We don't care about the return value from mention_regs because
5880 we are going to hash the SET_DEST values unconditionally. */
5881
5882 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5883 {
5884 if (sets[i].rtl)
5885 {
5886 rtx x = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5887
5888 if (!REG_P (x))
5889 mention_regs (x);
5890 else
5891 {
5892 /* We used to rely on all references to a register becoming
5893 inaccessible when a register changes to a new quantity,
5894 since that changes the hash code. However, that is not
5895 safe, since after HASH_SIZE new quantities we get a
5896 hash 'collision' of a register with its own invalid
5897 entries. And since SUBREGs have been changed not to
5898 change their hash code with the hash code of the register,
5899 it wouldn't work any longer at all. So we have to check
5900 for any invalid references lying around now.
5901 This code is similar to the REG case in mention_regs,
5902 but it knows that reg_tick has been incremented, and
5903 it leaves reg_in_table as -1 . */
5904 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
5905 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
5906 unsigned int i;
5907
5908 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
5909 {
5910 if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) >= 0)
5911 {
5912 remove_invalid_refs (i);
5913 REG_IN_TABLE (i) = -1;
5914 }
5915 }
5916 }
5917 }
5918 }
5919
5920 /* We may have just removed some of the src_elt's from the hash table.
5921 So replace each one with the current head of the same class.
5922 Also check if destination addresses have been removed. */
5923
5924 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5925 if (sets[i].rtl)
5926 {
5927 if (sets[i].dest_addr_elt
5928 && sets[i].dest_addr_elt->first_same_value == 0)
5929 {
5930 /* The elt was removed, which means this destination is not
5931 valid after this instruction. */
5932 sets[i].rtl = NULL_RTX;
5933 }
5934 else if (sets[i].src_elt && sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value == 0)
5935 /* If elt was removed, find current head of same class,
5936 or 0 if nothing remains of that class. */
5937 {
5938 struct table_elt *elt = sets[i].src_elt;
5939
5940 while (elt && elt->prev_same_value)
5941 elt = elt->prev_same_value;
5942
5943 while (elt && elt->first_same_value == 0)
5944 elt = elt->next_same_value;
5945 sets[i].src_elt = elt ? elt->first_same_value : 0;
5946 }
5947 }
5948
5949 /* Now insert the destinations into their equivalence classes. */
5950
5951 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5952 if (sets[i].rtl)
5953 {
5954 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5955 struct table_elt *elt;
5956
5957 /* Don't record value if we are not supposed to risk allocating
5958 floating-point values in registers that might be wider than
5959 memory. */
5960 if ((flag_float_store
5961 && MEM_P (dest)
5962 && FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dest)))
5963 /* Don't record BLKmode values, because we don't know the
5964 size of it, and can't be sure that other BLKmode values
5965 have the same or smaller size. */
5966 || GET_MODE (dest) == BLKmode
5967 /* If we didn't put a REG_EQUAL value or a source into the hash
5968 table, there is no point is recording DEST. */
5969 || sets[i].src_elt == 0)
5970 continue;
5971
5972 /* STRICT_LOW_PART isn't part of the value BEING set,
5973 and neither is the SUBREG inside it.
5974 Note that in this case SETS[I].SRC_ELT is really SRC_EQV_ELT. */
5975 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5976 dest = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
5977
5978 if (REG_P (dest) || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
5979 /* Registers must also be inserted into chains for quantities. */
5980 if (insert_regs (dest, sets[i].src_elt, 1))
5981 {
5982 /* If `insert_regs' changes something, the hash code must be
5983 recalculated. */
5984 rehash_using_reg (dest);
5985 sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
5986 }
5987
5988 /* If DEST is a paradoxical SUBREG, don't record DEST since the bits
5989 outside the mode of GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest)) are undefined. */
5990 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (dest))
5991 continue;
5992
5993 elt = insert (dest, sets[i].src_elt,
5994 sets[i].dest_hash, GET_MODE (dest));
5995
5996 /* If this is a constant, insert the constant anchors with the
5997 equivalent register-offset expressions using register DEST. */
5998 if (targetm.const_anchor
5999 && REG_P (dest)
6000 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dest))
6001 && GET_CODE (sets[i].src_elt->exp) == CONST_INT)
6002 insert_const_anchors (dest, sets[i].src_elt->exp, GET_MODE (dest));
6003
6004 elt->in_memory = (MEM_P (sets[i].inner_dest)
6005 && !MEM_READONLY_P (sets[i].inner_dest));
6006
6007 /* If we have (set (subreg:m1 (reg:m2 foo) 0) (bar:m1)), M1 is no
6008 narrower than M2, and both M1 and M2 are the same number of words,
6009 we are also doing (set (reg:m2 foo) (subreg:m2 (bar:m1) 0)) so
6010 make that equivalence as well.
6011
6012 However, BAR may have equivalences for which gen_lowpart
6013 will produce a simpler value than gen_lowpart applied to
6014 BAR (e.g., if BAR was ZERO_EXTENDed from M2), so we will scan all
6015 BAR's equivalences. If we don't get a simplified form, make
6016 the SUBREG. It will not be used in an equivalence, but will
6017 cause two similar assignments to be detected.
6018
6019 Note the loop below will find SUBREG_REG (DEST) since we have
6020 already entered SRC and DEST of the SET in the table. */
6021
6022 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6023 && (known_equal_after_align_down
6024 (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))) - 1,
6025 GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)) - 1,
6026 UNITS_PER_WORD))
6027 && !partial_subreg_p (dest)
6028 && sets[i].src_elt != 0)
6029 {
6030 machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest));
6031 struct table_elt *elt, *classp = 0;
6032
6033 for (elt = sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value; elt;
6034 elt = elt->next_same_value)
6035 {
6036 rtx new_src = 0;
6037 unsigned src_hash;
6038 struct table_elt *src_elt;
6039
6040 /* Ignore invalid entries. */
6041 if (!REG_P (elt->exp)
6042 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, false))
6043 continue;
6044
6045 /* We may have already been playing subreg games. If the
6046 mode is already correct for the destination, use it. */
6047 if (GET_MODE (elt->exp) == new_mode)
6048 new_src = elt->exp;
6049 else
6050 {
6051 poly_uint64 byte
6052 = subreg_lowpart_offset (new_mode, GET_MODE (dest));
6053 new_src = simplify_gen_subreg (new_mode, elt->exp,
6054 GET_MODE (dest), byte);
6055 }
6056
6057 /* The call to simplify_gen_subreg fails if the value
6058 is VOIDmode, yet we can't do any simplification, e.g.
6059 for EXPR_LISTs denoting function call results.
6060 It is invalid to construct a SUBREG with a VOIDmode
6061 SUBREG_REG, hence a zero new_src means we can't do
6062 this substitution. */
6063 if (! new_src)
6064 continue;
6065
6066 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
6067 src_elt = lookup (new_src, src_hash, new_mode);
6068
6069 /* Put the new source in the hash table is if isn't
6070 already. */
6071 if (src_elt == 0)
6072 {
6073 if (insert_regs (new_src, classp, 0))
6074 {
6075 rehash_using_reg (new_src);
6076 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
6077 }
6078 src_elt = insert (new_src, classp, src_hash, new_mode);
6079 src_elt->in_memory = elt->in_memory;
6080 if (GET_CODE (new_src) == ASM_OPERANDS
6081 && elt->cost == MAX_COST)
6082 src_elt->cost = MAX_COST;
6083 }
6084 else if (classp && classp != src_elt->first_same_value)
6085 /* Show that two things that we've seen before are
6086 actually the same. */
6087 merge_equiv_classes (src_elt, classp);
6088
6089 classp = src_elt->first_same_value;
6090 /* Ignore invalid entries. */
6091 while (classp
6092 && !REG_P (classp->exp)
6093 && ! exp_equiv_p (classp->exp, classp->exp, 1, false))
6094 classp = classp->next_same_value;
6095 }
6096 }
6097 }
6098
6099 /* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1) where REG0 is the
6100 "cheapest", cheaper than REG1. After cse, REG1 will probably not
6101 be used in the sequel, so (if easily done) change this insn to
6102 (set REG1 REG0) and replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn
6103 that computed their value. Then REG1 will become a dead store
6104 and won't cloud the situation for later optimizations.
6105
6106 Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
6107 then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
6108 into a three-operand insn.
6109
6110 Also do not do this if we are operating on a copy of INSN. */
6111
6112 if (n_sets == 1 && sets[0].rtl)
6113 try_back_substitute_reg (sets[0].rtl, insn);
6114
6115 done:;
6116 }
6117
6118 /* Remove from the hash table all expressions that reference memory. */
6120
6121 static void
6122 invalidate_memory (void)
6123 {
6124 int i;
6125 struct table_elt *p, *next;
6126
6127 for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
6128 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
6129 {
6130 next = p->next_same_hash;
6131 if (p->in_memory)
6132 remove_from_table (p, i);
6133 }
6134 }
6135
6136 /* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about INSN,
6137 except for invalidating the actual places that are SET in it.
6138 This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
6139 alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed. */
6140
6141 static void
6142 invalidate_from_clobbers (rtx_insn *insn)
6143 {
6144 rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
6145
6146 if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
6147 {
6148 rtx ref = XEXP (x, 0);
6149 if (ref)
6150 {
6151 if (REG_P (ref) || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
6152 || MEM_P (ref))
6153 invalidate (ref, VOIDmode);
6154 else if (GET_CODE (ref) == STRICT_LOW_PART
6155 || GET_CODE (ref) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
6156 invalidate (XEXP (ref, 0), GET_MODE (ref));
6157 }
6158 }
6159 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
6160 {
6161 int i;
6162 for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6163 {
6164 rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
6165 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
6166 {
6167 rtx ref = XEXP (y, 0);
6168 if (REG_P (ref) || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
6169 || MEM_P (ref))
6170 invalidate (ref, VOIDmode);
6171 else if (GET_CODE (ref) == STRICT_LOW_PART
6172 || GET_CODE (ref) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
6173 invalidate (XEXP (ref, 0), GET_MODE (ref));
6174 }
6175 }
6176 }
6177 }
6178
6179 /* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about INSN.
6181 This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
6182 alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed. */
6183
6184 static void
6185 invalidate_from_sets_and_clobbers (rtx_insn *insn)
6186 {
6187 rtx tem;
6188 rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
6189
6190 if (CALL_P (insn))
6191 {
6192 for (tem = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn); tem; tem = XEXP (tem, 1))
6193 {
6194 rtx temx = XEXP (tem, 0);
6195 if (GET_CODE (temx) == CLOBBER)
6196 invalidate (SET_DEST (temx), VOIDmode);
6197 }
6198 }
6199
6200 /* Ensure we invalidate the destination register of a CALL insn.
6201 This is necessary for machines where this register is a fixed_reg,
6202 because no other code would invalidate it. */
6203 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
6204 invalidate (SET_DEST (x), VOIDmode);
6205
6206 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
6207 {
6208 int i;
6209
6210 for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6211 {
6212 rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
6213 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
6214 {
6215 rtx clobbered = XEXP (y, 0);
6216
6217 if (REG_P (clobbered)
6218 || GET_CODE (clobbered) == SUBREG)
6219 invalidate (clobbered, VOIDmode);
6220 else if (GET_CODE (clobbered) == STRICT_LOW_PART
6221 || GET_CODE (clobbered) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
6222 invalidate (XEXP (clobbered, 0), GET_MODE (clobbered));
6223 }
6224 else if (GET_CODE (y) == SET && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
6225 invalidate (SET_DEST (y), VOIDmode);
6226 }
6227 }
6228 }
6229
6230 static rtx cse_process_note (rtx);
6232
6233 /* A simplify_replace_fn_rtx callback for cse_process_note. Process X,
6234 part of the REG_NOTES of an insn. Replace any registers with either
6235 an equivalent constant or the canonical form of the register.
6236 Only replace addresses if the containing MEM remains valid.
6237
6238 Return the replacement for X, or null if it should be simplified
6239 recursively. */
6240
6241 static rtx
6242 cse_process_note_1 (rtx x, const_rtx, void *)
6243 {
6244 if (MEM_P (x))
6245 {
6246 validate_change (x, &XEXP (x, 0), cse_process_note (XEXP (x, 0)), false);
6247 return x;
6248 }
6249
6250 if (REG_P (x))
6251 {
6252 int i = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
6253
6254 /* Return a constant or a constant register. */
6255 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
6256 {
6257 struct qty_table_elem *ent = &qty_table[i];
6258
6259 if (ent->const_rtx != NULL_RTX
6260 && (CONSTANT_P (ent->const_rtx)
6261 || REG_P (ent->const_rtx)))
6262 {
6263 rtx new_rtx = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), ent->const_rtx);
6264 if (new_rtx)
6265 return copy_rtx (new_rtx);
6266 }
6267 }
6268
6269 /* Otherwise, canonicalize this register. */
6270 return canon_reg (x, NULL);
6271 }
6272
6273 return NULL_RTX;
6274 }
6275
6276 /* Process X, part of the REG_NOTES of an insn. Replace any registers in it
6277 with either an equivalent constant or the canonical form of the register.
6278 Only replace addresses if the containing MEM remains valid. */
6279
6280 static rtx
6281 cse_process_note (rtx x)
6282 {
6283 return simplify_replace_fn_rtx (x, NULL_RTX, cse_process_note_1, NULL);
6284 }
6285
6286
6287 /* Find a path in the CFG, starting with FIRST_BB to perform CSE on.
6289
6290 DATA is a pointer to a struct cse_basic_block_data, that is used to
6291 describe the path.
6292 It is filled with a queue of basic blocks, starting with FIRST_BB
6293 and following a trace through the CFG.
6294
6295 If all paths starting at FIRST_BB have been followed, or no new path
6296 starting at FIRST_BB can be constructed, this function returns FALSE.
6297 Otherwise, DATA->path is filled and the function returns TRUE indicating
6298 that a path to follow was found.
6299
6300 If FOLLOW_JUMPS is false, the maximum path length is 1 and the only
6301 block in the path will be FIRST_BB. */
6302
6303 static bool
6304 cse_find_path (basic_block first_bb, struct cse_basic_block_data *data,
6305 int follow_jumps)
6306 {
6307 basic_block bb;
6308 edge e;
6309 int path_size;
6310
6311 bitmap_set_bit (cse_visited_basic_blocks, first_bb->index);
6312
6313 /* See if there is a previous path. */
6314 path_size = data->path_size;
6315
6316 /* There is a previous path. Make sure it started with FIRST_BB. */
6317 if (path_size)
6318 gcc_assert (data->path[0].bb == first_bb);
6319
6320 /* There was only one basic block in the last path. Clear the path and
6321 return, so that paths starting at another basic block can be tried. */
6322 if (path_size == 1)
6323 {
6324 path_size = 0;
6325 goto done;
6326 }
6327
6328 /* If the path was empty from the beginning, construct a new path. */
6329 if (path_size == 0)
6330 data->path[path_size++].bb = first_bb;
6331 else
6332 {
6333 /* Otherwise, path_size must be equal to or greater than 2, because
6334 a previous path exists that is at least two basic blocks long.
6335
6336 Update the previous branch path, if any. If the last branch was
6337 previously along the branch edge, take the fallthrough edge now. */
6338 while (path_size >= 2)
6339 {
6340 basic_block last_bb_in_path, previous_bb_in_path;
6341 edge e;
6342
6343 --path_size;
6344 last_bb_in_path = data->path[path_size].bb;
6345 previous_bb_in_path = data->path[path_size - 1].bb;
6346
6347 /* If we previously followed a path along the branch edge, try
6348 the fallthru edge now. */
6349 if (EDGE_COUNT (previous_bb_in_path->succs) == 2
6350 && any_condjump_p (BB_END (previous_bb_in_path))
6351 && (e = find_edge (previous_bb_in_path, last_bb_in_path))
6352 && e == BRANCH_EDGE (previous_bb_in_path))
6353 {
6354 bb = FALLTHRU_EDGE (previous_bb_in_path)->dest;
6355 if (bb != EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
6356 && single_pred_p (bb)
6357 /* We used to assert here that we would only see blocks
6358 that we have not visited yet. But we may end up
6359 visiting basic blocks twice if the CFG has changed
6360 in this run of cse_main, because when the CFG changes
6361 the topological sort of the CFG also changes. A basic
6362 blocks that previously had more than two predecessors
6363 may now have a single predecessor, and become part of
6364 a path that starts at another basic block.
6365
6366 We still want to visit each basic block only once, so
6367 halt the path here if we have already visited BB. */
6368 && !bitmap_bit_p (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb->index))
6369 {
6370 bitmap_set_bit (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb->index);
6371 data->path[path_size++].bb = bb;
6372 break;
6373 }
6374 }
6375
6376 data->path[path_size].bb = NULL;
6377 }
6378
6379 /* If only one block remains in the path, bail. */
6380 if (path_size == 1)
6381 {
6382 path_size = 0;
6383 goto done;
6384 }
6385 }
6386
6387 /* Extend the path if possible. */
6388 if (follow_jumps)
6389 {
6390 bb = data->path[path_size - 1].bb;
6391 while (bb && path_size < param_max_cse_path_length)
6392 {
6393 if (single_succ_p (bb))
6394 e = single_succ_edge (bb);
6395 else if (EDGE_COUNT (bb->succs) == 2
6396 && any_condjump_p (BB_END (bb)))
6397 {
6398 /* First try to follow the branch. If that doesn't lead
6399 to a useful path, follow the fallthru edge. */
6400 e = BRANCH_EDGE (bb);
6401 if (!single_pred_p (e->dest))
6402 e = FALLTHRU_EDGE (bb);
6403 }
6404 else
6405 e = NULL;
6406
6407 if (e
6408 && !((e->flags & EDGE_ABNORMAL_CALL) && cfun->has_nonlocal_label)
6409 && e->dest != EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
6410 && single_pred_p (e->dest)
6411 /* Avoid visiting basic blocks twice. The large comment
6412 above explains why this can happen. */
6413 && !bitmap_bit_p (cse_visited_basic_blocks, e->dest->index))
6414 {
6415 basic_block bb2 = e->dest;
6416 bitmap_set_bit (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb2->index);
6417 data->path[path_size++].bb = bb2;
6418 bb = bb2;
6419 }
6420 else
6421 bb = NULL;
6422 }
6423 }
6424
6425 done:
6426 data->path_size = path_size;
6427 return path_size != 0;
6428 }
6429
6430 /* Dump the path in DATA to file F. NSETS is the number of sets
6432 in the path. */
6433
6434 static void
6435 cse_dump_path (struct cse_basic_block_data *data, int nsets, FILE *f)
6436 {
6437 int path_entry;
6438
6439 fprintf (f, ";; Following path with %d sets: ", nsets);
6440 for (path_entry = 0; path_entry < data->path_size; path_entry++)
6441 fprintf (f, "%d ", (data->path[path_entry].bb)->index);
6442 fputc ('\n', f);
6443 fflush (f);
6444 }
6445
6446
6447 /* Return true if BB has exception handling successor edges. */
6449
6450 static bool
6451 have_eh_succ_edges (basic_block bb)
6452 {
6453 edge e;
6454 edge_iterator ei;
6455
6456 FOR_EACH_EDGE (e, ei, bb->succs)
6457 if (e->flags & EDGE_EH)
6458 return true;
6459
6460 return false;
6461 }
6462
6463
6464 /* Scan to the end of the path described by DATA. Return an estimate of
6466 the total number of SETs of all insns in the path. */
6467
6468 static void
6469 cse_prescan_path (struct cse_basic_block_data *data)
6470 {
6471 int nsets = 0;
6472 int path_size = data->path_size;
6473 int path_entry;
6474
6475 /* Scan to end of each basic block in the path. */
6476 for (path_entry = 0; path_entry < path_size; path_entry++)
6477 {
6478 basic_block bb;
6479 rtx_insn *insn;
6480
6481 bb = data->path[path_entry].bb;
6482
6483 FOR_BB_INSNS (bb, insn)
6484 {
6485 if (!INSN_P (insn))
6486 continue;
6487
6488 /* A PARALLEL can have lots of SETs in it,
6489 especially if it is really an ASM_OPERANDS. */
6490 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
6491 nsets += XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0);
6492 else
6493 nsets += 1;
6494 }
6495 }
6496
6497 data->nsets = nsets;
6498 }
6499
6500 /* Return true if the pattern of INSN uses a LABEL_REF for which
6502 there isn't a REG_LABEL_OPERAND note. */
6503
6504 static bool
6505 check_for_label_ref (rtx_insn *insn)
6506 {
6507 /* If this insn uses a LABEL_REF and there isn't a REG_LABEL_OPERAND
6508 note for it, we must rerun jump since it needs to place the note. If
6509 this is a LABEL_REF for a CODE_LABEL that isn't in the insn chain,
6510 don't do this since no REG_LABEL_OPERAND will be added. */
6511 subrtx_iterator::array_type array;
6512 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter, array, PATTERN (insn), ALL)
6513 {
6514 const_rtx x = *iter;
6515 if (GET_CODE (x) == LABEL_REF
6516 && !LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (x)
6517 && (!JUMP_P (insn)
6518 || !label_is_jump_target_p (label_ref_label (x), insn))
6519 && LABEL_P (label_ref_label (x))
6520 && INSN_UID (label_ref_label (x)) != 0
6521 && !find_reg_note (insn, REG_LABEL_OPERAND, label_ref_label (x)))
6522 return true;
6523 }
6524 return false;
6525 }
6526
6527 /* Process a single extended basic block described by EBB_DATA. */
6528
6529 static void
6530 cse_extended_basic_block (struct cse_basic_block_data *ebb_data)
6531 {
6532 int path_size = ebb_data->path_size;
6533 int path_entry;
6534 int num_insns = 0;
6535
6536 /* Allocate the space needed by qty_table. */
6537 qty_table = XNEWVEC (struct qty_table_elem, max_qty);
6538
6539 new_basic_block ();
6540 cse_ebb_live_in = df_get_live_in (ebb_data->path[0].bb);
6541 cse_ebb_live_out = df_get_live_out (ebb_data->path[path_size - 1].bb);
6542 for (path_entry = 0; path_entry < path_size; path_entry++)
6543 {
6544 basic_block bb;
6545 rtx_insn *insn;
6546
6547 bb = ebb_data->path[path_entry].bb;
6548
6549 /* Invalidate recorded information for eh regs if there is an EH
6550 edge pointing to that bb. */
6551 if (bb_has_eh_pred (bb))
6552 {
6553 df_ref def;
6554
6555 FOR_EACH_ARTIFICIAL_DEF (def, bb->index)
6556 if (DF_REF_FLAGS (def) & DF_REF_AT_TOP)
6557 invalidate (DF_REF_REG (def), GET_MODE (DF_REF_REG (def)));
6558 }
6559
6560 optimize_this_for_speed_p = optimize_bb_for_speed_p (bb);
6561 FOR_BB_INSNS (bb, insn)
6562 {
6563 /* If we have processed 1,000 insns, flush the hash table to
6564 avoid extreme quadratic behavior. We must not include NOTEs
6565 in the count since there may be more of them when generating
6566 debugging information. If we clear the table at different
6567 times, code generated with -g -O might be different than code
6568 generated with -O but not -g.
6569
6570 FIXME: This is a real kludge and needs to be done some other
6571 way. */
6572 if (NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn)
6573 && num_insns++ > param_max_cse_insns)
6574 {
6575 flush_hash_table ();
6576 num_insns = 0;
6577 }
6578
6579 if (INSN_P (insn))
6580 {
6581 /* Process notes first so we have all notes in canonical forms
6582 when looking for duplicate operations. */
6583 bool changed = false;
6584 for (rtx note = REG_NOTES (insn); note; note = XEXP (note, 1))
6585 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_EQUAL)
6586 {
6587 rtx newval = cse_process_note (XEXP (note, 0));
6588 if (newval != XEXP (note, 0))
6589 {
6590 XEXP (note, 0) = newval;
6591 changed = true;
6592 }
6593 }
6594 if (changed)
6595 df_notes_rescan (insn);
6596
6597 cse_insn (insn);
6598
6599 /* If we haven't already found an insn where we added a LABEL_REF,
6600 check this one. */
6601 if (INSN_P (insn) && !recorded_label_ref
6602 && check_for_label_ref (insn))
6603 recorded_label_ref = true;
6604 }
6605 }
6606
6607 /* With non-call exceptions, we are not always able to update
6608 the CFG properly inside cse_insn. So clean up possibly
6609 redundant EH edges here. */
6610 if (cfun->can_throw_non_call_exceptions && have_eh_succ_edges (bb))
6611 cse_cfg_altered |= purge_dead_edges (bb);
6612
6613 /* If we changed a conditional jump, we may have terminated
6614 the path we are following. Check that by verifying that
6615 the edge we would take still exists. If the edge does
6616 not exist anymore, purge the remainder of the path.
6617 Note that this will cause us to return to the caller. */
6618 if (path_entry < path_size - 1)
6619 {
6620 basic_block next_bb = ebb_data->path[path_entry + 1].bb;
6621 if (!find_edge (bb, next_bb))
6622 {
6623 do
6624 {
6625 path_size--;
6626
6627 /* If we truncate the path, we must also reset the
6628 visited bit on the remaining blocks in the path,
6629 or we will never visit them at all. */
6630 bitmap_clear_bit (cse_visited_basic_blocks,
6631 ebb_data->path[path_size].bb->index);
6632 ebb_data->path[path_size].bb = NULL;
6633 }
6634 while (path_size - 1 != path_entry);
6635 ebb_data->path_size = path_size;
6636 }
6637 }
6638
6639 /* If this is a conditional jump insn, record any known
6640 equivalences due to the condition being tested. */
6641 insn = BB_END (bb);
6642 if (path_entry < path_size - 1
6643 && EDGE_COUNT (bb->succs) == 2
6644 && JUMP_P (insn)
6645 && single_set (insn)
6646 && any_condjump_p (insn))
6647 {
6648 basic_block next_bb = ebb_data->path[path_entry + 1].bb;
6649 bool taken = (next_bb == BRANCH_EDGE (bb)->dest);
6650 record_jump_equiv (insn, taken);
6651 }
6652 }
6653
6654 gcc_assert (next_qty <= max_qty);
6655
6656 free (qty_table);
6657 }
6658
6659
6660 /* Perform cse on the instructions of a function.
6662 F is the first instruction.
6663 NREGS is one plus the highest pseudo-reg number used in the instruction.
6664
6665 Return 2 if jump optimizations should be redone due to simplifications
6666 in conditional jump instructions.
6667 Return 1 if the CFG should be cleaned up because it has been modified.
6668 Return 0 otherwise. */
6669
6670 static int
6671 cse_main (rtx_insn *f ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, int nregs)
6672 {
6673 struct cse_basic_block_data ebb_data;
6674 basic_block bb;
6675 int *rc_order = XNEWVEC (int, last_basic_block_for_fn (cfun));
6676 int i, n_blocks;
6677
6678 /* CSE doesn't use dominane info but can invalidate it in different ways.
6679 For simplicity free dominance info here. */
6680 free_dominance_info (CDI_DOMINATORS);
6681
6682 df_set_flags (DF_LR_RUN_DCE);
6683 df_note_add_problem ();
6684 df_analyze ();
6685 df_set_flags (DF_DEFER_INSN_RESCAN);
6686
6687 reg_scan (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
6688 init_cse_reg_info (nregs);
6689
6690 ebb_data.path = XNEWVEC (struct branch_path,
6691 param_max_cse_path_length);
6692
6693 cse_cfg_altered = false;
6694 cse_jumps_altered = false;
6695 recorded_label_ref = false;
6696 ebb_data.path_size = 0;
6697 ebb_data.nsets = 0;
6698 rtl_hooks = cse_rtl_hooks;
6699
6700 init_recog ();
6701 init_alias_analysis ();
6702
6703 reg_eqv_table = XNEWVEC (struct reg_eqv_elem, nregs);
6704
6705 /* Set up the table of already visited basic blocks. */
6706 cse_visited_basic_blocks = sbitmap_alloc (last_basic_block_for_fn (cfun));
6707 bitmap_clear (cse_visited_basic_blocks);
6708
6709 /* Loop over basic blocks in reverse completion order (RPO),
6710 excluding the ENTRY and EXIT blocks. */
6711 n_blocks = pre_and_rev_post_order_compute (NULL, rc_order, false);
6712 i = 0;
6713 while (i < n_blocks)
6714 {
6715 /* Find the first block in the RPO queue that we have not yet
6716 processed before. */
6717 do
6718 {
6719 bb = BASIC_BLOCK_FOR_FN (cfun, rc_order[i++]);
6720 }
6721 while (bitmap_bit_p (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb->index)
6722 && i < n_blocks);
6723
6724 /* Find all paths starting with BB, and process them. */
6725 while (cse_find_path (bb, &ebb_data, flag_cse_follow_jumps))
6726 {
6727 /* Pre-scan the path. */
6728 cse_prescan_path (&ebb_data);
6729
6730 /* If this basic block has no sets, skip it. */
6731 if (ebb_data.nsets == 0)
6732 continue;
6733
6734 /* Get a reasonable estimate for the maximum number of qty's
6735 needed for this path. For this, we take the number of sets
6736 and multiply that by MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS. */
6737 max_qty = ebb_data.nsets * MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS;
6738
6739 /* Dump the path we're about to process. */
6740 if (dump_file)
6741 cse_dump_path (&ebb_data, ebb_data.nsets, dump_file);
6742
6743 cse_extended_basic_block (&ebb_data);
6744 }
6745 }
6746
6747 /* Clean up. */
6748 end_alias_analysis ();
6749 free (reg_eqv_table);
6750 free (ebb_data.path);
6751 sbitmap_free (cse_visited_basic_blocks);
6752 free (rc_order);
6753 rtl_hooks = general_rtl_hooks;
6754
6755 if (cse_jumps_altered || recorded_label_ref)
6756 return 2;
6757 else if (cse_cfg_altered)
6758 return 1;
6759 else
6760 return 0;
6761 }
6762
6763 /* Count the number of times registers are used (not set) in X.
6765 COUNTS is an array in which we accumulate the count, INCR is how much
6766 we count each register usage.
6767
6768 Don't count a usage of DEST, which is the SET_DEST of a SET which
6769 contains X in its SET_SRC. This is because such a SET does not
6770 modify the liveness of DEST.
6771 DEST is set to pc_rtx for a trapping insn, or for an insn with side effects.
6772 We must then count uses of a SET_DEST regardless, because the insn can't be
6773 deleted here. */
6774
6775 static void
6776 count_reg_usage (rtx x, int *counts, rtx dest, int incr)
6777 {
6778 enum rtx_code code;
6779 rtx note;
6780 const char *fmt;
6781 int i, j;
6782
6783 if (x == 0)
6784 return;
6785
6786 switch (code = GET_CODE (x))
6787 {
6788 case REG:
6789 if (x != dest)
6790 counts[REGNO (x)] += incr;
6791 return;
6792
6793 case PC:
6794 case CONST:
6795 CASE_CONST_ANY:
6796 case SYMBOL_REF:
6797 case LABEL_REF:
6798 return;
6799
6800 case CLOBBER:
6801 /* If we are clobbering a MEM, mark any registers inside the address
6802 as being used. */
6803 if (MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
6804 count_reg_usage (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
6805 return;
6806
6807 case SET:
6808 /* Unless we are setting a REG, count everything in SET_DEST. */
6809 if (!REG_P (SET_DEST (x)))
6810 count_reg_usage (SET_DEST (x), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
6811 count_reg_usage (SET_SRC (x), counts,
6812 dest ? dest : SET_DEST (x),
6813 incr);
6814 return;
6815
6816 case DEBUG_INSN:
6817 return;
6818
6819 case CALL_INSN:
6820 case INSN:
6821 case JUMP_INSN:
6822 /* We expect dest to be NULL_RTX here. If the insn may throw,
6823 or if it cannot be deleted due to side-effects, mark this fact
6824 by setting DEST to pc_rtx. */
6825 if ((!cfun->can_delete_dead_exceptions && !insn_nothrow_p (x))
6826 || side_effects_p (PATTERN (x)))
6827 dest = pc_rtx;
6828 if (code == CALL_INSN)
6829 count_reg_usage (CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (x), counts, dest, incr);
6830 count_reg_usage (PATTERN (x), counts, dest, incr);
6831
6832 /* Things used in a REG_EQUAL note aren't dead since loop may try to
6833 use them. */
6834
6835 note = find_reg_equal_equiv_note (x);
6836 if (note)
6837 {
6838 rtx eqv = XEXP (note, 0);
6839
6840 if (GET_CODE (eqv) == EXPR_LIST)
6841 /* This REG_EQUAL note describes the result of a function call.
6842 Process all the arguments. */
6843 do
6844 {
6845 count_reg_usage (XEXP (eqv, 0), counts, dest, incr);
6846 eqv = XEXP (eqv, 1);
6847 }
6848 while (eqv && GET_CODE (eqv) == EXPR_LIST);
6849 else
6850 count_reg_usage (eqv, counts, dest, incr);
6851 }
6852 return;
6853
6854 case EXPR_LIST:
6855 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL
6856 || (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) != REG_NONNEG && GET_CODE (XEXP (x,0)) == USE)
6857 /* FUNCTION_USAGE expression lists may include (CLOBBER (mem /u)),
6858 involving registers in the address. */
6859 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CLOBBER)
6860 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 0), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
6861
6862 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 1), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
6863 return;
6864
6865 case ASM_OPERANDS:
6866 /* Iterate over just the inputs, not the constraints as well. */
6867 for (i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6868 count_reg_usage (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i), counts, dest, incr);
6869 return;
6870
6871 case INSN_LIST:
6872 case INT_LIST:
6873 gcc_unreachable ();
6874
6875 default:
6876 break;
6877 }
6878
6879 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
6880 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6881 {
6882 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
6883 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, i), counts, dest, incr);
6884 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
6885 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
6886 count_reg_usage (XVECEXP (x, i, j), counts, dest, incr);
6887 }
6888 }
6889
6890 /* Return true if X is a dead register. */
6892
6893 static inline int
6894 is_dead_reg (const_rtx x, int *counts)
6895 {
6896 return (REG_P (x)
6897 && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6898 && counts[REGNO (x)] == 0);
6899 }
6900
6901 /* Return true if set is live. */
6902 static bool
6903 set_live_p (rtx set, int *counts)
6904 {
6905 if (set_noop_p (set))
6906 return false;
6907
6908 if (!is_dead_reg (SET_DEST (set), counts)
6909 || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set)))
6910 return true;
6911
6912 return false;
6913 }
6914
6915 /* Return true if insn is live. */
6916
6917 static bool
6918 insn_live_p (rtx_insn *insn, int *counts)
6919 {
6920 int i;
6921 if (!cfun->can_delete_dead_exceptions && !insn_nothrow_p (insn))
6922 return true;
6923 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
6924 return set_live_p (PATTERN (insn), counts);
6925 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
6926 {
6927 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6928 {
6929 rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
6930
6931 if (GET_CODE (elt) == SET)
6932 {
6933 if (set_live_p (elt, counts))
6934 return true;
6935 }
6936 else if (GET_CODE (elt) != CLOBBER && GET_CODE (elt) != USE)
6937 return true;
6938 }
6939 return false;
6940 }
6941 else if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
6942 {
6943 rtx_insn *next;
6944
6945 if (DEBUG_MARKER_INSN_P (insn))
6946 return true;
6947
6948 for (next = NEXT_INSN (insn); next; next = NEXT_INSN (next))
6949 if (NOTE_P (next))
6950 continue;
6951 else if (!DEBUG_INSN_P (next))
6952 return true;
6953 /* If we find an inspection point, such as a debug begin stmt,
6954 we want to keep the earlier debug insn. */
6955 else if (DEBUG_MARKER_INSN_P (next))
6956 return true;
6957 else if (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_DECL (insn) == INSN_VAR_LOCATION_DECL (next))
6958 return false;
6959
6960 return true;
6961 }
6962 else
6963 return true;
6964 }
6965
6966 /* Count the number of stores into pseudo. Callback for note_stores. */
6967
6968 static void
6969 count_stores (rtx x, const_rtx set ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, void *data)
6970 {
6971 int *counts = (int *) data;
6972 if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6973 counts[REGNO (x)]++;
6974 }
6975
6976 /* Return if DEBUG_INSN pattern PAT needs to be reset because some dead
6977 pseudo doesn't have a replacement. COUNTS[X] is zero if register X
6978 is dead and REPLACEMENTS[X] is null if it has no replacemenet.
6979 Set *SEEN_REPL to true if we see a dead register that does have
6980 a replacement. */
6981
6982 static bool
6983 is_dead_debug_insn (const_rtx pat, int *counts, rtx *replacements,
6984 bool *seen_repl)
6985 {
6986 subrtx_iterator::array_type array;
6987 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter, array, pat, NONCONST)
6988 {
6989 const_rtx x = *iter;
6990 if (is_dead_reg (x, counts))
6991 {
6992 if (replacements && replacements[REGNO (x)] != NULL_RTX)
6993 *seen_repl = true;
6994 else
6995 return true;
6996 }
6997 }
6998 return false;
6999 }
7000
7001 /* Replace a dead pseudo in a DEBUG_INSN with replacement DEBUG_EXPR.
7002 Callback for simplify_replace_fn_rtx. */
7003
7004 static rtx
7005 replace_dead_reg (rtx x, const_rtx old_rtx ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, void *data)
7006 {
7007 rtx *replacements = (rtx *) data;
7008
7009 if (REG_P (x)
7010 && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
7011 && replacements[REGNO (x)] != NULL_RTX)
7012 {
7013 if (GET_MODE (x) == GET_MODE (replacements[REGNO (x)]))
7014 return replacements[REGNO (x)];
7015 return lowpart_subreg (GET_MODE (x), replacements[REGNO (x)],
7016 GET_MODE (replacements[REGNO (x)]));
7017 }
7018 return NULL_RTX;
7019 }
7020
7021 /* Scan all the insns and delete any that are dead; i.e., they store a register
7022 that is never used or they copy a register to itself.
7023
7024 This is used to remove insns made obviously dead by cse, loop or other
7025 optimizations. It improves the heuristics in loop since it won't try to
7026 move dead invariants out of loops or make givs for dead quantities. The
7027 remaining passes of the compilation are also sped up. */
7028
7029 int
7030 delete_trivially_dead_insns (rtx_insn *insns, int nreg)
7031 {
7032 int *counts;
7033 rtx_insn *insn, *prev;
7034 rtx *replacements = NULL;
7035 int ndead = 0;
7036
7037 timevar_push (TV_DELETE_TRIVIALLY_DEAD);
7038 /* First count the number of times each register is used. */
7039 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_BIND_INSNS)
7040 {
7041 counts = XCNEWVEC (int, nreg * 3);
7042 for (insn = insns; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7043 if (DEBUG_BIND_INSN_P (insn))
7044 count_reg_usage (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn), counts + nreg,
7045 NULL_RTX, 1);
7046 else if (INSN_P (insn))
7047 {
7048 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, NULL_RTX, 1);
7049 note_stores (insn, count_stores, counts + nreg * 2);
7050 }
7051 /* If there can be debug insns, COUNTS are 3 consecutive arrays.
7052 First one counts how many times each pseudo is used outside
7053 of debug insns, second counts how many times each pseudo is
7054 used in debug insns and third counts how many times a pseudo
7055 is stored. */
7056 }
7057 else
7058 {
7059 counts = XCNEWVEC (int, nreg);
7060 for (insn = insns; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7061 if (INSN_P (insn))
7062 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, NULL_RTX, 1);
7063 /* If no debug insns can be present, COUNTS is just an array
7064 which counts how many times each pseudo is used. */
7065 }
7066 /* Pseudo PIC register should be considered as used due to possible
7067 new usages generated. */
7068 if (!reload_completed
7069 && pic_offset_table_rtx
7070 && REGNO (pic_offset_table_rtx) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
7071 counts[REGNO (pic_offset_table_rtx)]++;
7072 /* Go from the last insn to the first and delete insns that only set unused
7073 registers or copy a register to itself. As we delete an insn, remove
7074 usage counts for registers it uses.
7075
7076 The first jump optimization pass may leave a real insn as the last
7077 insn in the function. We must not skip that insn or we may end
7078 up deleting code that is not really dead.
7079
7080 If some otherwise unused register is only used in DEBUG_INSNs,
7081 try to create a DEBUG_EXPR temporary and emit a DEBUG_INSN before
7082 the setter. Then go through DEBUG_INSNs and if a DEBUG_EXPR
7083 has been created for the unused register, replace it with
7084 the DEBUG_EXPR, otherwise reset the DEBUG_INSN. */
7085 for (insn = get_last_insn (); insn; insn = prev)
7086 {
7087 int live_insn = 0;
7088
7089 prev = PREV_INSN (insn);
7090 if (!INSN_P (insn))
7091 continue;
7092
7093 live_insn = insn_live_p (insn, counts);
7094
7095 /* If this is a dead insn, delete it and show registers in it aren't
7096 being used. */
7097
7098 if (! live_insn && dbg_cnt (delete_trivial_dead))
7099 {
7100 if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
7101 {
7102 if (DEBUG_BIND_INSN_P (insn))
7103 count_reg_usage (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn), counts + nreg,
7104 NULL_RTX, -1);
7105 }
7106 else
7107 {
7108 rtx set;
7109 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_BIND_INSNS
7110 && (set = single_set (insn)) != NULL_RTX
7111 && is_dead_reg (SET_DEST (set), counts)
7112 /* Used at least once in some DEBUG_INSN. */
7113 && counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) + nreg] > 0
7114 /* And set exactly once. */
7115 && counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) + nreg * 2] == 1
7116 && !side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set))
7117 && asm_noperands (PATTERN (insn)) < 0)
7118 {
7119 rtx dval, bind_var_loc;
7120 rtx_insn *bind;
7121
7122 /* Create DEBUG_EXPR (and DEBUG_EXPR_DECL). */
7123 dval = make_debug_expr_from_rtl (SET_DEST (set));
7124
7125 /* Emit a debug bind insn before the insn in which
7126 reg dies. */
7127 bind_var_loc =
7128 gen_rtx_VAR_LOCATION (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)),
7129 DEBUG_EXPR_TREE_DECL (dval),
7130 SET_SRC (set),
7131 VAR_INIT_STATUS_INITIALIZED);
7132 count_reg_usage (bind_var_loc, counts + nreg, NULL_RTX, 1);
7133
7134 bind = emit_debug_insn_before (bind_var_loc, insn);
7135 df_insn_rescan (bind);
7136
7137 if (replacements == NULL)
7138 replacements = XCNEWVEC (rtx, nreg);
7139 replacements[REGNO (SET_DEST (set))] = dval;
7140 }
7141
7142 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, NULL_RTX, -1);
7143 ndead++;
7144 }
7145 cse_cfg_altered |= delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
7146 }
7147 }
7148
7149 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_BIND_INSNS)
7150 {
7151 for (insn = get_last_insn (); insn; insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
7152 if (DEBUG_BIND_INSN_P (insn))
7153 {
7154 /* If this debug insn references a dead register that wasn't replaced
7155 with an DEBUG_EXPR, reset the DEBUG_INSN. */
7156 bool seen_repl = false;
7157 if (is_dead_debug_insn (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn),
7158 counts, replacements, &seen_repl))
7159 {
7160 INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn) = gen_rtx_UNKNOWN_VAR_LOC ();
7161 df_insn_rescan (insn);
7162 }
7163 else if (seen_repl)
7164 {
7165 INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn)
7166 = simplify_replace_fn_rtx (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn),
7167 NULL_RTX, replace_dead_reg,
7168 replacements);
7169 df_insn_rescan (insn);
7170 }
7171 }
7172 free (replacements);
7173 }
7174
7175 if (dump_file && ndead)
7176 fprintf (dump_file, "Deleted %i trivially dead insns\n",
7177 ndead);
7178 /* Clean up. */
7179 free (counts);
7180 timevar_pop (TV_DELETE_TRIVIALLY_DEAD);
7181 return ndead;
7182 }
7183
7184 /* If LOC contains references to NEWREG in a different mode, change them
7185 to use NEWREG instead. */
7186
7187 static void
7188 cse_change_cc_mode (subrtx_ptr_iterator::array_type &array,
7189 rtx *loc, rtx_insn *insn, rtx newreg)
7190 {
7191 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX_PTR (iter, array, loc, NONCONST)
7192 {
7193 rtx *loc = *iter;
7194 rtx x = *loc;
7195 if (x
7196 && REG_P (x)
7197 && REGNO (x) == REGNO (newreg)
7198 && GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (newreg))
7199 {
7200 validate_change (insn, loc, newreg, 1);
7201 iter.skip_subrtxes ();
7202 }
7203 }
7204 }
7205
7206 /* Change the mode of any reference to the register REGNO (NEWREG) to
7207 GET_MODE (NEWREG) in INSN. */
7208
7209 static void
7210 cse_change_cc_mode_insn (rtx_insn *insn, rtx newreg)
7211 {
7212 int success;
7213
7214 if (!INSN_P (insn))
7215 return;
7216
7217 subrtx_ptr_iterator::array_type array;
7218 cse_change_cc_mode (array, &PATTERN (insn), insn, newreg);
7219 cse_change_cc_mode (array, ®_NOTES (insn), insn, newreg);
7220
7221 /* If the following assertion was triggered, there is most probably
7222 something wrong with the cc_modes_compatible back end function.
7223 CC modes only can be considered compatible if the insn - with the mode
7224 replaced by any of the compatible modes - can still be recognized. */
7225 success = apply_change_group ();
7226 gcc_assert (success);
7227 }
7228
7229 /* Change the mode of any reference to the register REGNO (NEWREG) to
7230 GET_MODE (NEWREG), starting at START. Stop before END. Stop at
7231 any instruction which modifies NEWREG. */
7232
7233 static void
7234 cse_change_cc_mode_insns (rtx_insn *start, rtx_insn *end, rtx newreg)
7235 {
7236 rtx_insn *insn;
7237
7238 for (insn = start; insn != end; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7239 {
7240 if (! INSN_P (insn))
7241 continue;
7242
7243 if (reg_set_p (newreg, insn))
7244 return;
7245
7246 cse_change_cc_mode_insn (insn, newreg);
7247 }
7248 }
7249
7250 /* BB is a basic block which finishes with CC_REG as a condition code
7251 register which is set to CC_SRC. Look through the successors of BB
7252 to find blocks which have a single predecessor (i.e., this one),
7253 and look through those blocks for an assignment to CC_REG which is
7254 equivalent to CC_SRC. CAN_CHANGE_MODE indicates whether we are
7255 permitted to change the mode of CC_SRC to a compatible mode. This
7256 returns VOIDmode if no equivalent assignments were found.
7257 Otherwise it returns the mode which CC_SRC should wind up with.
7258 ORIG_BB should be the same as BB in the outermost cse_cc_succs call,
7259 but is passed unmodified down to recursive calls in order to prevent
7260 endless recursion.
7261
7262 The main complexity in this function is handling the mode issues.
7263 We may have more than one duplicate which we can eliminate, and we
7264 try to find a mode which will work for multiple duplicates. */
7265
7266 static machine_mode
7267 cse_cc_succs (basic_block bb, basic_block orig_bb, rtx cc_reg, rtx cc_src,
7268 bool can_change_mode)
7269 {
7270 bool found_equiv;
7271 machine_mode mode;
7272 unsigned int insn_count;
7273 edge e;
7274 rtx_insn *insns[2];
7275 machine_mode modes[2];
7276 rtx_insn *last_insns[2];
7277 unsigned int i;
7278 rtx newreg;
7279 edge_iterator ei;
7280
7281 /* We expect to have two successors. Look at both before picking
7282 the final mode for the comparison. If we have more successors
7283 (i.e., some sort of table jump, although that seems unlikely),
7284 then we require all beyond the first two to use the same
7285 mode. */
7286
7287 found_equiv = false;
7288 mode = GET_MODE (cc_src);
7289 insn_count = 0;
7290 FOR_EACH_EDGE (e, ei, bb->succs)
7291 {
7292 rtx_insn *insn;
7293 rtx_insn *end;
7294
7295 if (e->flags & EDGE_COMPLEX)
7296 continue;
7297
7298 if (EDGE_COUNT (e->dest->preds) != 1
7299 || e->dest == EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
7300 /* Avoid endless recursion on unreachable blocks. */
7301 || e->dest == orig_bb)
7302 continue;
7303
7304 end = NEXT_INSN (BB_END (e->dest));
7305 for (insn = BB_HEAD (e->dest); insn != end; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7306 {
7307 rtx set;
7308
7309 if (! INSN_P (insn))
7310 continue;
7311
7312 /* If CC_SRC is modified, we have to stop looking for
7313 something which uses it. */
7314 if (modified_in_p (cc_src, insn))
7315 break;
7316
7317 /* Check whether INSN sets CC_REG to CC_SRC. */
7318 set = single_set (insn);
7319 if (set
7320 && REG_P (SET_DEST (set))
7321 && REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) == REGNO (cc_reg))
7322 {
7323 bool found;
7324 machine_mode set_mode;
7325 machine_mode comp_mode;
7326
7327 found = false;
7328 set_mode = GET_MODE (SET_SRC (set));
7329 comp_mode = set_mode;
7330 if (rtx_equal_p (cc_src, SET_SRC (set)))
7331 found = true;
7332 else if (GET_CODE (cc_src) == COMPARE
7333 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set)) == COMPARE
7334 && mode != set_mode
7335 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cc_src, 0),
7336 XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0))
7337 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cc_src, 1),
7338 XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 1)))
7339
7340 {
7341 comp_mode = targetm.cc_modes_compatible (mode, set_mode);
7342 if (comp_mode != VOIDmode
7343 && (can_change_mode || comp_mode == mode))
7344 found = true;
7345 }
7346
7347 if (found)
7348 {
7349 found_equiv = true;
7350 if (insn_count < ARRAY_SIZE (insns))
7351 {
7352 insns[insn_count] = insn;
7353 modes[insn_count] = set_mode;
7354 last_insns[insn_count] = end;
7355 ++insn_count;
7356
7357 if (mode != comp_mode)
7358 {
7359 gcc_assert (can_change_mode);
7360 mode = comp_mode;
7361
7362 /* The modified insn will be re-recognized later. */
7363 PUT_MODE (cc_src, mode);
7364 }
7365 }
7366 else
7367 {
7368 if (set_mode != mode)
7369 {
7370 /* We found a matching expression in the
7371 wrong mode, but we don't have room to
7372 store it in the array. Punt. This case
7373 should be rare. */
7374 break;
7375 }
7376 /* INSN sets CC_REG to a value equal to CC_SRC
7377 with the right mode. We can simply delete
7378 it. */
7379 delete_insn (insn);
7380 }
7381
7382 /* We found an instruction to delete. Keep looking,
7383 in the hopes of finding a three-way jump. */
7384 continue;
7385 }
7386
7387 /* We found an instruction which sets the condition
7388 code, so don't look any farther. */
7389 break;
7390 }
7391
7392 /* If INSN sets CC_REG in some other way, don't look any
7393 farther. */
7394 if (reg_set_p (cc_reg, insn))
7395 break;
7396 }
7397
7398 /* If we fell off the bottom of the block, we can keep looking
7399 through successors. We pass CAN_CHANGE_MODE as false because
7400 we aren't prepared to handle compatibility between the
7401 further blocks and this block. */
7402 if (insn == end)
7403 {
7404 machine_mode submode;
7405
7406 submode = cse_cc_succs (e->dest, orig_bb, cc_reg, cc_src, false);
7407 if (submode != VOIDmode)
7408 {
7409 gcc_assert (submode == mode);
7410 found_equiv = true;
7411 can_change_mode = false;
7412 }
7413 }
7414 }
7415
7416 if (! found_equiv)
7417 return VOIDmode;
7418
7419 /* Now INSN_COUNT is the number of instructions we found which set
7420 CC_REG to a value equivalent to CC_SRC. The instructions are in
7421 INSNS. The modes used by those instructions are in MODES. */
7422
7423 newreg = NULL_RTX;
7424 for (i = 0; i < insn_count; ++i)
7425 {
7426 if (modes[i] != mode)
7427 {
7428 /* We need to change the mode of CC_REG in INSNS[i] and
7429 subsequent instructions. */
7430 if (! newreg)
7431 {
7432 if (GET_MODE (cc_reg) == mode)
7433 newreg = cc_reg;
7434 else
7435 newreg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, REGNO (cc_reg));
7436 }
7437 cse_change_cc_mode_insns (NEXT_INSN (insns[i]), last_insns[i],
7438 newreg);
7439 }
7440
7441 cse_cfg_altered |= delete_insn_and_edges (insns[i]);
7442 }
7443
7444 return mode;
7445 }
7446
7447 /* If we have a fixed condition code register (or two), walk through
7448 the instructions and try to eliminate duplicate assignments. */
7449
7450 static void
7451 cse_condition_code_reg (void)
7452 {
7453 unsigned int cc_regno_1;
7454 unsigned int cc_regno_2;
7455 rtx cc_reg_1;
7456 rtx cc_reg_2;
7457 basic_block bb;
7458
7459 if (! targetm.fixed_condition_code_regs (&cc_regno_1, &cc_regno_2))
7460 return;
7461
7462 cc_reg_1 = gen_rtx_REG (CCmode, cc_regno_1);
7463 if (cc_regno_2 != INVALID_REGNUM)
7464 cc_reg_2 = gen_rtx_REG (CCmode, cc_regno_2);
7465 else
7466 cc_reg_2 = NULL_RTX;
7467
7468 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (bb, cfun)
7469 {
7470 rtx_insn *last_insn;
7471 rtx cc_reg;
7472 rtx_insn *insn;
7473 rtx_insn *cc_src_insn;
7474 rtx cc_src;
7475 machine_mode mode;
7476 machine_mode orig_mode;
7477
7478 /* Look for blocks which end with a conditional jump based on a
7479 condition code register. Then look for the instruction which
7480 sets the condition code register. Then look through the
7481 successor blocks for instructions which set the condition
7482 code register to the same value. There are other possible
7483 uses of the condition code register, but these are by far the
7484 most common and the ones which we are most likely to be able
7485 to optimize. */
7486
7487 last_insn = BB_END (bb);
7488 if (!JUMP_P (last_insn))
7489 continue;
7490
7491 if (reg_referenced_p (cc_reg_1, PATTERN (last_insn)))
7492 cc_reg = cc_reg_1;
7493 else if (cc_reg_2 && reg_referenced_p (cc_reg_2, PATTERN (last_insn)))
7494 cc_reg = cc_reg_2;
7495 else
7496 continue;
7497
7498 cc_src_insn = NULL;
7499 cc_src = NULL_RTX;
7500 for (insn = PREV_INSN (last_insn);
7501 insn && insn != PREV_INSN (BB_HEAD (bb));
7502 insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
7503 {
7504 rtx set;
7505
7506 if (! INSN_P (insn))
7507 continue;
7508 set = single_set (insn);
7509 if (set
7510 && REG_P (SET_DEST (set))
7511 && REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) == REGNO (cc_reg))
7512 {
7513 cc_src_insn = insn;
7514 cc_src = SET_SRC (set);
7515 break;
7516 }
7517 else if (reg_set_p (cc_reg, insn))
7518 break;
7519 }
7520
7521 if (! cc_src_insn)
7522 continue;
7523
7524 if (modified_between_p (cc_src, cc_src_insn, NEXT_INSN (last_insn)))
7525 continue;
7526
7527 /* Now CC_REG is a condition code register used for a
7528 conditional jump at the end of the block, and CC_SRC, in
7529 CC_SRC_INSN, is the value to which that condition code
7530 register is set, and CC_SRC is still meaningful at the end of
7531 the basic block. */
7532
7533 orig_mode = GET_MODE (cc_src);
7534 mode = cse_cc_succs (bb, bb, cc_reg, cc_src, true);
7535 if (mode != VOIDmode)
7536 {
7537 gcc_assert (mode == GET_MODE (cc_src));
7538 if (mode != orig_mode)
7539 {
7540 rtx newreg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, REGNO (cc_reg));
7541
7542 cse_change_cc_mode_insn (cc_src_insn, newreg);
7543
7544 /* Do the same in the following insns that use the
7545 current value of CC_REG within BB. */
7546 cse_change_cc_mode_insns (NEXT_INSN (cc_src_insn),
7547 NEXT_INSN (last_insn),
7548 newreg);
7549 }
7550 }
7551 }
7552 }
7553
7554
7556 /* Perform common subexpression elimination. Nonzero value from
7557 `cse_main' means that jumps were simplified and some code may now
7558 be unreachable, so do jump optimization again. */
7559 static unsigned int
7560 rest_of_handle_cse (void)
7561 {
7562 int tem;
7563
7564 if (dump_file)
7565 dump_flow_info (dump_file, dump_flags);
7566
7567 tem = cse_main (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
7568
7569 /* If we are not running more CSE passes, then we are no longer
7570 expecting CSE to be run. But always rerun it in a cheap mode. */
7571 cse_not_expected = !flag_rerun_cse_after_loop && !flag_gcse;
7572
7573 if (tem == 2)
7574 {
7575 timevar_push (TV_JUMP);
7576 rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
7577 cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (CLEANUP_CFG_CHANGED);
7578 timevar_pop (TV_JUMP);
7579 }
7580 else if (tem == 1 || optimize > 1)
7581 cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (0);
7582
7583 return 0;
7584 }
7585
7586 namespace {
7587
7588 const pass_data pass_data_cse =
7589 {
7590 RTL_PASS, /* type */
7591 "cse1", /* name */
7592 OPTGROUP_NONE, /* optinfo_flags */
7593 TV_CSE, /* tv_id */
7594 0, /* properties_required */
7595 0, /* properties_provided */
7596 0, /* properties_destroyed */
7597 0, /* todo_flags_start */
7598 TODO_df_finish, /* todo_flags_finish */
7599 };
7600
7601 class pass_cse : public rtl_opt_pass
7602 {
7603 public:
7604 pass_cse (gcc::context *ctxt)
7605 : rtl_opt_pass (pass_data_cse, ctxt)
7606 {}
7607
7608 /* opt_pass methods: */
7609 virtual bool gate (function *) { return optimize > 0; }
7610 virtual unsigned int execute (function *) { return rest_of_handle_cse (); }
7611
7612 }; // class pass_cse
7613
7614 } // anon namespace
7615
7616 rtl_opt_pass *
7617 make_pass_cse (gcc::context *ctxt)
7618 {
7619 return new pass_cse (ctxt);
7620 }
7621
7622
7623 /* Run second CSE pass after loop optimizations. */
7624 static unsigned int
7625 rest_of_handle_cse2 (void)
7626 {
7627 int tem;
7628
7629 if (dump_file)
7630 dump_flow_info (dump_file, dump_flags);
7631
7632 tem = cse_main (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
7633
7634 /* Run a pass to eliminate duplicated assignments to condition code
7635 registers. We have to run this after bypass_jumps, because it
7636 makes it harder for that pass to determine whether a jump can be
7637 bypassed safely. */
7638 cse_condition_code_reg ();
7639
7640 delete_trivially_dead_insns (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
7641
7642 if (tem == 2)
7643 {
7644 timevar_push (TV_JUMP);
7645 rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
7646 cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (CLEANUP_CFG_CHANGED);
7647 timevar_pop (TV_JUMP);
7648 }
7649 else if (tem == 1 || cse_cfg_altered)
7650 cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (0);
7651
7652 cse_not_expected = 1;
7653 return 0;
7654 }
7655
7656
7657 namespace {
7658
7659 const pass_data pass_data_cse2 =
7660 {
7661 RTL_PASS, /* type */
7662 "cse2", /* name */
7663 OPTGROUP_NONE, /* optinfo_flags */
7664 TV_CSE2, /* tv_id */
7665 0, /* properties_required */
7666 0, /* properties_provided */
7667 0, /* properties_destroyed */
7668 0, /* todo_flags_start */
7669 TODO_df_finish, /* todo_flags_finish */
7670 };
7671
7672 class pass_cse2 : public rtl_opt_pass
7673 {
7674 public:
7675 pass_cse2 (gcc::context *ctxt)
7676 : rtl_opt_pass (pass_data_cse2, ctxt)
7677 {}
7678
7679 /* opt_pass methods: */
7680 virtual bool gate (function *)
7681 {
7682 return optimize > 0 && flag_rerun_cse_after_loop;
7683 }
7684
7685 virtual unsigned int execute (function *) { return rest_of_handle_cse2 (); }
7686
7687 }; // class pass_cse2
7688
7689 } // anon namespace
7690
7691 rtl_opt_pass *
7692 make_pass_cse2 (gcc::context *ctxt)
7693 {
7694 return new pass_cse2 (ctxt);
7695 }
7696
7697 /* Run second CSE pass after loop optimizations. */
7698 static unsigned int
7699 rest_of_handle_cse_after_global_opts (void)
7700 {
7701 int save_cfj;
7702 int tem;
7703
7704 /* We only want to do local CSE, so don't follow jumps. */
7705 save_cfj = flag_cse_follow_jumps;
7706 flag_cse_follow_jumps = 0;
7707
7708 rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
7709 tem = cse_main (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
7710 cse_cfg_altered |= purge_all_dead_edges ();
7711 delete_trivially_dead_insns (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
7712
7713 cse_not_expected = !flag_rerun_cse_after_loop;
7714
7715 /* If cse altered any jumps, rerun jump opts to clean things up. */
7716 if (tem == 2)
7717 {
7718 timevar_push (TV_JUMP);
7719 rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
7720 cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (CLEANUP_CFG_CHANGED);
7721 timevar_pop (TV_JUMP);
7722 }
7723 else if (tem == 1 || cse_cfg_altered)
7724 cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (0);
7725
7726 flag_cse_follow_jumps = save_cfj;
7727 return 0;
7728 }
7729
7730 namespace {
7731
7732 const pass_data pass_data_cse_after_global_opts =
7733 {
7734 RTL_PASS, /* type */
7735 "cse_local", /* name */
7736 OPTGROUP_NONE, /* optinfo_flags */
7737 TV_CSE, /* tv_id */
7738 0, /* properties_required */
7739 0, /* properties_provided */
7740 0, /* properties_destroyed */
7741 0, /* todo_flags_start */
7742 TODO_df_finish, /* todo_flags_finish */
7743 };
7744
7745 class pass_cse_after_global_opts : public rtl_opt_pass
7746 {
7747 public:
7748 pass_cse_after_global_opts (gcc::context *ctxt)
7749 : rtl_opt_pass (pass_data_cse_after_global_opts, ctxt)
7750 {}
7751
7752 /* opt_pass methods: */
7753 virtual bool gate (function *)
7754 {
7755 return optimize > 0 && flag_rerun_cse_after_global_opts;
7756 }
7757
7758 virtual unsigned int execute (function *)
7759 {
7760 return rest_of_handle_cse_after_global_opts ();
7761 }
7762
7763 }; // class pass_cse_after_global_opts
7764
7765 } // anon namespace
7766
7767 rtl_opt_pass *
7768 make_pass_cse_after_global_opts (gcc::context *ctxt)
7769 {
7770 return new pass_cse_after_global_opts (ctxt);
7771 }
7772